Transcripción de documentos
Owner’s Manual
IMPORTANT
Check Your Power Supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches
the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom
panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be
provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard
unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage
selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.
To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to
rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage
appears next to the pointer on the panel.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.
The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when
it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.
DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CVP-105
CVP-109/CVP-107
CVP-700
Model _____________________________________
Serial No. __________________________________
92-469- ➀
(bottom)
Purchase Date ______________________________
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.
If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,
or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• On the CVP-109/700, bumping the surface of the instrument with metal,
porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use
caution.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in the key cover gap.
• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of
the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the
power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch
from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly
result in the instrument overheating.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,
radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect
proper operation of the other products.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
■USING THE BENCH (if included)
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten
them periodically using the included tool.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do
not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• On the CVP-109/700, gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not
wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument’s finish.
• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the loss
of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
1
(1)B_EL/CL-4vari.
■SAVING USER DATA
CVP-109/107/105/700
3
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Accessories
● Music Software Collection Disk (and Music Book)
This disk features sample songs that you can play back on your Clavinova, as well as MIDI
driver software for computers.
● Floppy Disk
Use this blank disk to record your performances.
● Owner’s Manual
This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.
● Reference Booklet
This manual contains lists of voices, styles, and parameters, etc., as well as specifications
and assembly instructions for your Clavinova.
● Bench
A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s
manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
● Trademarks:
• Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other
than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.
• This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents
No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from
IVL Technologies Ltd.
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft®
Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which
guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play
accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer
from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with
greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect
capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the
Clavinova’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible
song files.
XF Format
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability
for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when
an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The Clavinova is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using
SMF Format 0.)
Disk Orchestra Collection
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI
devices.
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file
format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide highquality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of
chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads
optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the
Custom Style feature.
2
4
Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony
to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony can even
change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as
the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony
effects.
CVP-109/107/105/700
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Features of the Clavinova
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
● Large, Easy-to-use LCD Display
The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control of the Clavinova’s operations (page 16).
● Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices
The Clavinova has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices, including 224 original voices
(195 voices on the CVP-105), 6 Organ Flute voices (CVP-109/107/700), 480 XG voices, and 13 drum/
SFX kits (12 kits on the CVP-105). These include exceptionally natural-sounding piano, strings and
brass voices, and the particularly expressive “sweet” wind voices (the CVP-105 has one sweet voice,
“SweetTrumpet”). Moreover, you can play realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard (page 36).
● Playback of Song Disks
The Clavinova can play back various commercially available song disks. With the appropriate disk
software, you can play the piano part of the song yourself along with a full orchestra or backing band
(page 113). If the software contains lyrics, you can display them on the Clavinova’s LCD — on the
CVP-107, CVP-109 and CVP-700, you can even output them to a television screen via the VIDEO
OUT jack (page 215).
● Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning
With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps help you learn songs by
showing you when and where to play the proper notes. The three-step system helps you to master each
song quickly and easily (page 125).
● Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment
The Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova gives you full, exciting instrumental backing in your
favorite music styles, according to the chords you play (page 69). There’s even a wide selection of
“Pianist” styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompaniment (page 70). Choose from no less
than 170 accompaniment styles (the exact number of styles depends on the model), or create your own
custom styles (page 91).
● Easy Access to a Variety of Musical Enjoyment
The Clavinova offers several ways to change panel settings without a lot of fuss. You can use the
One Touch Setting feature to select from four sets of voice, effect, and other settings appropriate to
each accompaniment style (page 90). Or access the Music Database to choose from more than 400 sets
of style and voice settings, selectable by title or style (page 79). You can even save your current setup
for instant recall later using the handy Registration function (page 108).
● Easy-to-use Recording Features
You can record songs using a variety of methods, depending on your keyboard expertise and preference. Choose from the Quick Recording, Track Recording, Chord Sequence Recording, and Step Edit
functions (page 130).
● Automatic Vocal Harmony Function (CVP-109/107/700)
The Clavinova’s unique Vocal Harmony feature employs advanced voice-processing technology to
automatically produce vocal harmony based on a lead vocal, allowing a single singer to sound like a
vocal group (page 175).
● Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection to Computers
3
The Clavinova can be used as a high-quality sound source to play back music software for computers. It can also be used as a master keyboard, to enter performance data and create music with a computer (page 216).
CVP-109/107/105/700
5
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Table of Contents
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard
— Split Mode
41
CHAPTER 1:
Getting Ready
About This Manual
8
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks
9
Setting Up the Clavinova
10
Music Stand ..................................................................................... 10
Key Cover ........................................................................................ 10
Lid (CVP-700 only) ........................................................................... 11
Turning the Power On and Off ......................................................... 11
Panel Controls and Terminals
12
Playing the Demo Songs
14
CHAPTER 2:
23
25
Changing the Master Equalizer Settings .......................................... 25
Using the Equalizer Lock Function .................................................. 26
Using the Metronome
27
CHAPTER 4:
Reverb and Other Effects
46
Chorus
51
Turning the Chorus On or Off .......................................................... 51
Changing the Chorus Settings ......................................................... 52
Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)
54
Turning the Effects On or Off ........................................................... 54
Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 55
Voice Effects (CVP-105)
58
Turning the Effects On ..................................................................... 58
Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 58
CHAPTER 5:
Accompaniment Styles
(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)
Selecting Accompaniment Styles
61
Selecting a Style .............................................................................. 61
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
63
Using the Metronome ....................................................................... 27
Changing the Metronome Settings .................................................. 28
Varying the Style .............................................................................. 63
Starting the Accompaniment Style ................................................... 64
Stopping the Accompaniment Style ................................................. 67
Using the Help Mode
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
29
CHAPTER 3:
Voices
Selecting Voices
31
Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display ....................... 31
Selecting Voices from the Main Display ........................................... 32
Organ Flutes (CVP-109/107/700) .................................................... 33
Keyboard Percussion ....................................................................... 36
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice ....................... 36
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode
38
Selecting the Second Voice ............................................................. 38
Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode ........................................... 38
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice ................... 39
Exiting the Dual Mode ...................................................................... 40
69
Using the Auto Accompaniment ....................................................... 69
Starting the Auto Accompaniment ................................................... 70
Stopping the Auto Accompaniment .................................................. 70
Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................................. 71
Adjusting Individual Part Levels ....................................................... 77
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
79
Music Database ............................................................................... 79
Accompaniment Assistance ............................................................. 81
Harmony .......................................................................................... 87
One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 90
Creating Your Own Styles
91
Recording a Custom Style ............................................................... 91
Other Custom Style Functions ......................................................... 99
Playing Back Your Custom Styles ................................................. 103
Messages in Custom Style Mode .................................................. 103
4
6
45
Damper Pedal (Right) ...................................................................... 45
Sostenuto Pedal (Center) ................................................................ 45
Soft Pedal (Left) ............................................................................... 45
16
Adjusting the Overall Volume ........................................................... 23
Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume ............................... 23
Setting the Keyboard Volume .......................................................... 23
Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels ............................... 24
Using an Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700) .............................. 24
Adjusting the Timbre (CVP-109/107/700)
Using the Pedals
Turning the Reverb On or Off .......................................................... 46
Changing the Reverb Settings ......................................................... 47
Selecting a Function ........................................................................ 16
Changing a Setting .......................................................................... 17
Changing a Setting in a Menu Display ............................................. 18
Resetting a Function’s Value ........................................................... 19
Displaying a Different Page ............................................................. 20
Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles .................................. 21
Exiting to the Main Display ............................................................... 21
Using the Direct Access Function .................................................... 22
Adjusting the Volume
Selecting the Left Voice ................................................................... 41
Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode ........................................... 42
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice ......................... 42
Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously ........................ 44
Exiting the Split Mode ...................................................................... 44
Reverb
Basic Operation
Using the LCD Display Controls
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CVP-109/107/105/700
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Using Style Files
105
About the Yamaha Style File Format ............................................. 105
Loading Styles from a Disk ............................................................ 105
Playing Loaded Style Files ............................................................. 107
CHAPTER 8:
Vocal Harmony
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
175
Registrations
Using Vocal Harmony .................................................................... 175
Changing the Vocal Harmony Settings .......................................... 176
Using Vocal Harmony Data ............................................................ 184
Using Registrations (Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) 108
CHAPTER 9:
Storing a Panel Setup .................................................................... 108
Recalling the Registered Panel Settings ........................................ 109
Protecting Panel Settings ............................................................... 110
Naming the Registration ................................................................ 111
The Utility Functions
CHAPTER 6:
CHAPTER 7:
Keyboard
188
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1 ............................. 188
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2 ............................. 189
Pedal
Song Control
190
FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3 ........................................ 190
Song Playback
113
Song Playback ............................................................................... 113
Part Cancel .................................................................................... 117
Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment .... 118
Overall Song Playback Volume Control ......................................... 119
Adjustment of Track Settings ......................................................... 120
Changing Settings in the MIXER Display ....................................... 121
Repeat Functions ........................................................................... 122
Other Playback Controls ................................................................ 124
Playing Other Types of Music Data ............................................... 124
Guide Control
125
Guide Methods and Piano Roll ...................................................... 125
Using the Guide Function .............................................................. 126
Other Guide-related Functions ....................................................... 128
Song Recording
130
Recording Setup: Disk Format ....................................................... 131
Quick Recording ............................................................................ 132
Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) ....................................... 135
Adding New Tracks ........................................................................ 138
Punch-in/out Recording ................................................................. 138
Chord Sequence
Disk
MIDI
Backup
Utility
208
FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15 ....................... 208
FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16 ....................... 209
FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] Display — page 17 (CVP-109/107/700) .. 212
CHAPTER 10:
146
166
Song Name .................................................................................... 166
Track Edit ....................................................................................... 167
Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) ............................................. 170
Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display ................................ 171
Setup Memory ................................................................................ 172
Vocal Harmony Memory (CVP 109/107/700) ................................. 173
Recording Without a Disk
206
FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13 ................................ 206
FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14 ................................ 207
141
Editing Song Events ....................................................................... 146
Common Parameters ..................................................................... 150
Event-specific Parameters ............................................................. 151
Editing the Event Lists ................................................................... 158
Filtering the Event List ................................................................... 161
Recording Music in Step Edit Mode ............................................... 162
Saving Your Changes .................................................................... 165
Other Record Edit Functions
201
FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9 ......................................... 201
FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10 ....................................... 202
FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11 ....................................... 203
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12 ....................................... 204
Connections
Other Chord Sequence Functions ................................................. 144
Step Edit
192
FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4 ......................................... 192
FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5 ......................................... 196
FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6 ......................................... 198
FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7 ......................................... 199
FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8 ......................................... 200
174
Audio and Video Connections
213
Headphones ................................................................................... 213
Microphone (CVP-109/107/700) .................................................... 213
Audio Input and Output .................................................................. 214
Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700) ........................................... 215
Video Monitor (CVP-109/107/700) ................................................. 215
Data Connections
216
Connecting MIDI Equipment .......................................................... 216
Connecting to a Host Computer ..................................................... 216
APPENDICES
Effect Type Lists ............................................................................ 218
Messages ....................................................................................... 221
Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 227
MIDI and Data Compatibility .......................................................... 229
Index .............................................................................................. 230
5
About the CVP MEMORY Song ..................................................... 174
CVP-109/107/105/700
7
CHAPTER
1: Getting Ready
About This Manual
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
This section explains the notation conventions that are used
throughout this manual.
■ Square brackets [ ] ............................................................................................
Square brackets enclose the names of panel buttons,
sliders, and connectors as they appear on your
Clavinova. For example, the DEMO button is expressed
as [DEMO] in this manual.
DEMO
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
■ Bold characters ....................................................................................................
Bold type represents items shown in the LCD display, as well as the corresponding LCD buttons (i.e., the buttons directly below, or to the left or
right of, these items). For example, the phrase “Select RIGHT1 VOICE”
means that you should press the button directly below the “RIGHT1
VOICE” label at the bottom of the display.
CVP-107/700
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
■ Arrows in Operation Explanations ..................................................
Different types of arrows are used to distinguish the steps of an operation
from its results.
Operation steps
♥➾♣
…indicates that you should do ♥, then do ♣.
Operation results
♥➔♠
6
8
…indicates that doing ♥ results in ♠.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks
● Precautions
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with
care. Follow the important precautions below.
● Compatible Disk Type
3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
■ Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks .............
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards
the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly
pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the
eject button pops out.
DISK IN USE
○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write
Head ......................................................................................
● Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors.
● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
● Never open or close the key cover while a disk is
extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position).
The key cover may contact the disk, possibily damaging the disk or even the disk drive.
● Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
■ About the Floppy Disks ...................................
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the
FDD is stopped (check if the [DISK IN USE] lamp is off).
Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk
will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected,
carefully remove it by hand.
DISK IN USE lamp
DISK IN USE
To handle floppy disks with care:
● Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or
apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep
floppy disks in their protective cases when they are
not in use.
● Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
● Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside.
● Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors,
etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely
erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location.
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the
disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).
Data backup
For maximum data security Yamaha
recommends that you keep two copies of
important data on separate floppy disks.
This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
or damaged. To make a backup disk use
the Disk Copy function on page 196.
7
Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can
damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.
If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed
position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only
a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull
out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this
situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the
floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into
the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.
Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive
for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that
can cause data read and write errors.
CVP-109/107/105/700
9
Setting Up the Clavinova
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Music Stand
■ To raise the music stand: ...........................................................................
Z Pull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go.
CVP-109
X Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear
of the music stand.
C Lower the music stand so that it rests on the metal supports.
On the CVP-109/107/105, the illustration shows that the angle of the
music stand can be set in one of three positions, according to the position
of the metal supports. Set the left and right metal supports to the same
position.
■ To lower the music stand: ........................................................................
Z Pull the music stand toward yourself as far as it will go.
CVP-109
X Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear surface of the stand.
C Gently lower the music stand backward until it is all the way down.
CAUTION
• Do not try to use the music stand in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the
stand, let the stand all the way down before releasing it.
Key Cover
■ To open the key cover: ..................................................................................
Z Lift the cover slightly (not too much).
X Slide the cover open.
CVP-109
Be careful to avoid catching your
fingers when opening or closing
the cover.
■ To close the key cover: .................................................................................
Z Slide the cover toward you.
X Gently lower the cover over the keys.
CAUTION
CVP-109
8
10
• Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully
opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the
cover and main unit.
• Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover
may fall inside the instrument when the cover is opened, and may be impossible to
remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to
the instrument.
CVP-109/107/105/700
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Setting
Up the Clavinova
Lid (CVP-700 only)
■ To open the lid: .....................................................................................................
ZRaise the music stand as described in “Music Stand” on page 10.
XRaise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end
of the instrument).
CRaise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay
fits into the recess in the lid.
■ To close the lid: .....................................................................................................
ZHold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.
-1
-2
XHold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.
CCarefully lower the lid, then lower the music stand as described in
“Music Stand” on page 10.
CAUTION
• Make sure that the end of the stay fits securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess the lid may fall causing damage or injury.
• Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may
be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall.
• Be careful not to catch your fingers when raising or lowering the lid.
Turning the Power On and Off
Z Connect the power cord.
Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the
bottom panel of the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.
In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
POWER
X Press the [POWER] switch.
The main display appears in the LCD display. (Initially, the voice
Grand Piano and the accompaniment style 8 Beat 1 are selected.)
The power lamp below the lower left end of the keyboard also lights.
C Adjust the LCD.
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CONTRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.
CONTRAST
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MIN
V Adjust the volume.
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume to an appropriate level.
● When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch
again. Both the LCD display and the power lamp below the left end
of the keyboard will turn off.
9
MAX
CVP-109/107/105/700
11
Panel Controls and Terminals
b
n
Mac
PC-1
TO HOST
m
/
MIDI
PC-2
HOST SELECT
AUX IN
THRU
OUT
AUX OUT
L/L+R
R
IN
L/L+R
R
X
L/L+R
L/L+R
R
AUX OUT
AUX IN
,
.
R
EXP.
PEDAL
PAL
NTSC
VIDEO
OUT VIDEO SELECT
b
MIDI
OUT
IN
THRU
PEDAL
HOST SELECT
MIDI
CVP-109
CVP-107
CVP-700
○○○○○○○○○○○
PC-2
MIDI
CVP-105
.
,
m
TO HOST
PC-1
Mac
n
/ Z
6
*
STYLE
DEMO
1 2
HELP
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
MAX
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
3
4
5 8
VOCAL
HARMONY
OVER
SIGNAL
MAX
8BEAT
ACMP ON
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
9
0
7
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
METRONOME
(
u
i
RESET
TAP
q
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
MIN
MIN
PAGE
! @ # $ % ^ &
CVP-109
A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0
t
)
TEMPO
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
CONTRAST
BEAT
DISK
CUSTOM
MUSIC
DATABASE
INTRO
BALLAD
w e r
p
y
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3
CVP-109
MIC. VOL.
MIN
CVP-109
CVP-107
CVP-700
v
v
PHONES
PHONES
MIC.
MAX
c
MIC/LINE
zx
CVP-105
Volume Section
1 [MASTER VOLUME] .................................... page 23
2 [ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................ page 23
Special Mode Control Section
3 [DEMO] ......................................................... page 14
4 [HELP] .......................................................... page 28
5 [VOCAL HARMONY] (CVP-109/107/700) .. page 175
61
91
79
81
87
Auto Accompaniment Section
! [ACMP ON] ................................................... page
@ [INTRO] ......................................................... page
# [MAIN A] ....................................................... page
$ [MAIN B] ....................................................... page
% [MAIN C] ....................................................... page
^ [MAIN D] ....................................................... page
& [ENDING] ...................................................... page
69
66
63
63
63
63
67
CVP-109/107/105/700
64
27
27
65
Start/Stop Section
w [FADE IN/OUT] ..................................... pages 67, 68
e [SYNCHRO] .................................................. page 65
r [START/STOP] ..................................... pages 64, 67
Display Control Section
t [CONTRAST] ................................................ page 10
y PAGE [<], [>] .............................................. page 20
u LCD display .................................................. page 16
i Left LCD buttons .......................................... page 18
o Right LCD buttons ........................................ page 18
p LCD buttons .................................................. page 17
Q [EXIT] ............................................................ page 21
W [DIRECT ACCESS] ...................................... page 22
E Data dial ....................................................... page 17
R [–], [+] ............................................................ page 17
Main Mode Control Section
T [SONG] ....................................................... page 114
Y [MIXER] ........................................................ page 24
U [MASTER EQUALIZER] (CVP-109/107/700) .. page 25
10
12
Accompaniment Style Section
6 STYLE buttons ............................................. page
7 [DISK/CUSTOM] ........................................... page
8 [MUSIC DATABASE] .................................... page
9 [ACMP ASSIST]............................................ page
0 [HARMONY] ................................................. page
Metronome Section
* [BEAT] ........................................................... page
( [METRONOME] ............................................ page
) TEMPO [–], [+] ............................................. page
q [TAP] ............................................................. page
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Panel
C
V
CVP-109
B
T Y U I
SONG
o
Controls and Terminals
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
E
j
J
VOICE
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
PIANO
E. PIANO
GUITAR
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
DUAL
SPLIT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
K
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
O
R
EXIT
P
SOUND
REPEAT
a
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
k l ; A S
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
Q W
BANK
s d f g h
D
F
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
G
H
REGISTRATION
:
L
POWER
F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
I [FUNCTION] ............................................... page 188
K Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .................................. page 9
Guide Control Section
O [EASY PLAY] .............................................. page 125
P [NEXT NOTE] ............................................. page 125
a [SOUND REPEAT] ..................................... page 126
L [POWER] ...................................................... page 11
Song Control Section
s [PAUSE] ...................................................... page 124
d [REW] ......................................................... page 124
f [FF] ............................................................. page 124
g [PLAY/STOP] .............................................. page 115
h [REC] ..........................................................page 133
213
213
213
213
Voice Section
j VOICE buttons ............................................. page
k [DUAL] .......................................................... page
l [SPLIT] .......................................................... page
; [REVERB] ..................................................... page
A [CHORUS] .................................................... page
S [EFFECT] .............................................. pages 54,
31
38
41
46
51
58
Registration/One Touch Setting Section
D [1] through [4] ..................................... pages 90, 109
F BANK [–] [+] ................................................ page 108
G [ONE TOUCH SETTING] ............................. page 90
H [REGISTRATION] ....................................... page 109
: Keyboard guide lamps ............................... page 129
Microphone and Headphone Connectors
z [MIC. VOL.] (CVP-109/107/700) ................ page
x [MIC.] (CVP-109/107/700) ......................... page
c [MIC/LINE] (CVP-109/107/700) ................. page
v [PHONES]................................................... page
Connectors
b [TO HOST] .................................................. page 216
n [HOST SELECT] .........................................page 216
m MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ........................... page 216
, AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] ................................ page 215
. AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] ....................................page 214
/ [EXP. PEDAL] (CVP-109/107/700) ............. page 215
Z [VIDEO OUT] (CVP-109/107/700) ............. page 215
X [VIDEO SELECT] (CVP-109/107/700) ...... page 215
Pedals
C Soft pedal ..................................................... page 45
V Sostenuto pedal ........................................... page 45
B Damper pedal ............................................... page 45
11
J [DISK IN USE] lamp ....................................... page 9
CVP-109/107/105/700
13
Playing the Demo Songs
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova features a total of 50 demo songs: 4 feature songs,
24 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 22 pieces showcasing
the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the Clavinova can do.
Z Call up the Demo Play mode. ..............................................................
Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button
flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears.
DEMO
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
X Select the desired play mode. ............................................................
Select the desired play mode by pressing the rightmost LCD button. The
following three modes are available:
ALL
All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the
selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.
RANDOM
All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected
song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.
SINGLE
Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished,
playback stops automatically.
C Select the song and start playback. .............................................
When you select a song, the demo automatically starts playing in the
selected play mode. There are three ways to select a demo song, as described below:
(A) To listen to one of the featured demo songs, press one of
the buttons under the numbers 1 through 4 in the display.
• You can also start the demo playback,
beginning with the first feature song, by
pressing [START/STOP] or [PLAY/
STOP].
• For a complete list of the Clavinova’s
demo songs, refer to page 9 of the
Reference Booklet.
➔ The current song number is highlighted during playback.
CVP-109/107/105/700
12
14
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
(B) To listen to a voice demo, press the VOICE button corresponding to the desired voice category.
➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.
The lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes.
Playing the Demo Songs
There are two demo songs for each voice
category. To skip to the second song,
press the flashing button a second time.
VOICE
PIANO
E. PIANO
GUITAR
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
(C)
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
To listen to a style demo, press the STYLE button corresponding to the desired style category.
➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.
The lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes.
There are two demo songs for each style
category. To skip to the second song,
press the flashing button a second time.
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
DISK
CUSTOM
V Adjust the volume. ..........................................................................................
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume.
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control
cannot be used.
B Stop the demo playback. .........................................................................
To stop playback, press either [START/STOP] or [PLAY/STOP], or
the LCD button corresponding to the song that’s currently playing.
N Exit the Demo mode. .....................................................................................
To change songs during playback:
Press the LCD button, VOICE button, or
STYLE button of another song; the song
then changes. When ALL or RANDOM is
selected as the play mode, the Clavinova
will play other songs when the selected
song is finished.
To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]).
13
● Playing Along with the Demo Songs
You can play the keyboard while a demo song is playing back. You
can also change the tempo (page 27) and use the [REW], [FF] and
[PAUSE] buttons. When you play 3. Lyric Demo, the Clavinova will
display the lyrics so you can sing (as well as play) along; if you sing into
a microphone connected to the CVP-109/107/700, you can use the Vocal
Harmony function to add harmony to your vocals. Also, you can use the
Guide function (page 125) while the Clavinova is playing 4. GUIDE
Demo. You cannot change the voice selection while the demo is playing, however.
Demo song data is not output through
the [MIDI OUT] terminal; however, your
keyboard performance data is output.
CVP-109/107/105/700
15
CHAPTER
2: Basic Operation
Using the LCD Display Controls
○○○○○○○○○
You will refer to the LCD display frequently as you operate your
Clavinova. This section consists of a short tutorial that will help
you learn how to read the LCD display and use the related
controls.
Selecting a Function
Many of the Clavinova’s functions are displayed at the bottom of the
LCD. The main display shown below contains two functions: KBD VOL
and RIGHT1 VOICE. These items are displayed in rounded rectangles,
which means they represent settings that can be changed.
Main display
Remember, the main display is the display that appears first when you turn the
power on.
CVP-107/700
Before you can change a function’s setting, however, you have to select it
first. In the main display, the RIGHT1 VOICE function is highlighted, indicating that this function is currently selected.
To select a function, press and quickly release the LCD button directly
below that function. For example, you can select KBD VOL by pressing the
leftmost LCD button.
Highlighted items
Selected items are highlighted (i.e., white
letters on a dark background).
LCD buttons
The five LCD buttons under the LCD
display represent different functions,
depending on the contents of the display.
Press to select.
CVP-109/107/105/700
14
16
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using
the LCD Display Controls
Changing a Setting
There are several ways to change a function’s value. Here are two of the
main ways:
■ Using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons .................................
Once you have selected a function, you can change its setting with the
data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Since you have just selected KBD
VOL, try turning the dial or pressing the [–] button until it reads 0.
The KBD VOL function sets the keyboard volume. When you set it to
0, you will find that the keyboard won’t produce any sound, no matter
how high you set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider!
You can press the [–] and [+] buttons
repeatedly to change the value a little, or
hold them down to change it quickly.
Refer to page 23 for details on the KBD
VOL function.
■ Using the LCD buttons ..................................................................................
You can also increase a setting by simply pressing and holding the
corresponding LCD button. For now, since you’ll want to hear your keyboard later on, press and hold the leftmost LCD button until the value for
KBD VOL is back up to 127.
This is why you should release the LCD
button quickly when you select a function: you could end up raising its value
when you want to lower it!
Hold down to increase.
15
Once you’ve got the keyboard volume back where it belongs, you can
learn about a couple of other ways to change settings.
CVP-109/107/105/700
17
Using the LCD Display Controls
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Changing a Setting in a Menu Display
You can use either of the methods described previously to change the current voice
selection. Just press RIGHT1 VOICE and hold the button down, or use the data dial or
the [+] button to scan through the options. Try listening to a few of the voices while
you’re at it…
The problem with this method is that it can be hard to find the voice you’re looking
for — after all, the Clavinova has more than 600 voices! So you’ll probably want to use
a menu display to see what your choices are. Try pressing the [PIANO] button now.
PIANO
E. PIANO
GUITAR
Voice
A voice is one of the sounds
the Clavinova uses to make
music.
SYNTHESIZER
When you press one of the VOICE buttons, the LCD displays a two-column
menu listing the voices of that type. You should now be looking at a menu of
piano voices.
Refer to page 31 for more
details about selecting voices.
■ Using the ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons .......................................................................
This display has one function, VOICE, that corresponds to two LCD buttons
labeled ▲ and ▼. You can use these buttons to select a different piano voice, much
as you would use the [–] and [+] buttons.
■ Using the left and right LCD buttons ............................................................
You may have noticed that each item in the menu corresponds to one of the buttons to the left and right of the LCD. You can press one of these buttons to select
the corresponding menu item directly — which is much quicker than using the ▲
and ▼ buttons.
Left and right LCD buttons
The buttons to the left and right
of the LCD are referred to as
the left and right LCD buttons.
Use any of the shaded controls to select a voice.
As you can see, the menu display lets you select voices using any of a
number of controls: the two rightmost LCD buttons, any of the left and right
LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons. Try selecting different
piano voices in this display before you move on.
CVP-109/107/105/700
16
18
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using
the LCD Display Controls
Resetting a Function’s Value
After you have changed a function’s value, you may find you want to
restore its basic setting. To demonstrate this, we’ll have to look at another of
the Clavinova’s displays. Press the [FUNCTION] button.
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
This button calls up one of the Clavinova’s FUNCTION displays. You
can use this display to tune and transpose the keyboard.
The TUNE function in this display has ▼ and ▲ LCD buttons like the
ones you used in the VOICE SELECT display. You can use these buttons to
tune the keyboard up or down. Press and hold the ▼ button (or use the data
dial or the [–] button) to tune the keyboard down as far as it will go.
If you play a few notes, you’ll notice that your Clavinova is flat by quite
a bit. Now, let’s assume that you want to reset the keyboard to the standard
440.0 Hz. You could use the ▲ button (or the data dial, or the [+] button) to
return the value to its basic setting — but there’s an easier way:
When a function has a basic setting, you can reset it to that value by
pressing both the ▲ and ▼ buttons (or both the [–] and [+] buttons) simultaneously. Try doing this now.
Basic settings
• The functions of the Clavinova are set
to certain standard values or standard
conditions when the instrument is
shipped. These settings and conditions
are called the basic settings.
• A function’s basic settings are generally noted in the sidebar together with
the possible settings for that function.
• You can also use the Recall function
(page 207) to restore basic settings at
any time.
Refer to page 188 for details on the
TUNE and TRANSPOSE functions.
There are some functions whose settings
cannot be returned to the basic value by
pressing the ▲ and ▼ buttons (or [–] and
[+] buttons) simultaneously.
17
When you’ve got the keyboard back in tune, you’re ready to go on to the
next operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
19
Using the LCD Display Controls
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Displaying a Different Page
Whereas the ▲ and ▼ buttons of the VOICE function you used in the
VOICE SELECT display change the menu selection, those of the TUNE
function do not. The menu items in the FUNCTION display are not related
to the TUNE function; instead, they represent different FUNCTION display
pages. If you look again at the top of the display, you’ll see that you’re looking at a display named FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1], and it’s apparently
the first of many function displays.
Remember that you can always select menu items using the left and right
LCD buttons. Press the left LCD button that corresponds to PEDAL in the
menu.
This button displays the FUNCTION [PEDAL] page, which you can use
to adjust the operation of your Clavinova’s pedals. But wait — the box in
the upper right corner says this is page 3! We seem to have skipped right
past page 2…
When a display is divided into pages, you can use PAGE buttons to
change pages. Try pressing the [<] button now to see page 2.
Display pages
Some displays are divided into two or
more pages, indicated by a series of
overlapping boxes in the upper right
corner of the display. The number in the
topmost box is the number of the current
display page.
Refer to page 190 for details about the
functions on the FUNCTION [PEDAL]
display page.
PAGE
Page 2 is FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2], another page of keyboard settings. You can use the page buttons to select different pages of multi-page
displays, not only in FUNCTION mode, but also in certain VOICE SELECT
and STYLE SELECT displays. But don’t change the page yet: we’re going
to use page 2 to discuss the next operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
18
20
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using
the LCD Display Controls
Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles
In addition to the FIXED VELOCITY function, which is selected in this
display, the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] page has two functions in normal
rectangles: KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING. Such functions cannot be
selected; instead, pressing the corresponding LCD button changes the setting
directly without selecting the function.
By pressing the LCD button under KEY TOUCH, for example, you can
set the Clavinova’s response to how hard you play. The value displayed in
the rectangle switches from NORMAL to SOFT, then FIXED, then HARD
— but the FIXED VELOCITY function remains selected.
The VOICE SETTING function determines whether reverb, chorus,
effect, and other settings are automatically selected when a voice is selected. It works a little differently: when you press the LCD button, the
highlighted setting switches between AUTO and MANUAL. Still,
FIXED VELOCITY remains selected.
There are other sorts of functions that are displayed in non-rounded
rectangles, like the ones you used to select a demo song in Demo mode
(see page 14). The important thing to remember about these functions is
that you don’t select them, you execute them.
Now we’re ready to return to the main display. First, however, set the
KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING functions back to NORMAL and
AUTO, respectively.
The FIXED VELOCITY function is described on page 189.
For more details on the KEY TOUCH
function, refer to page 189.
For more details on the VOICE SETTING
function, refer to page 189.
Exiting to the Main Display
To exit the current display, press the [EXIT] button.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
You can usually use [EXIT] to get back to
the main display. In some cases, however, this button will return you to a previous setting display instead. When this
happens, pressing [EXIT] again will get
you back to the main display.
19
The main display should show the name of the last piano voice that you
selected in the VOICE SELECT [PIANO] display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
21
Using the LCD Display Controls
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Using the Direct Access Function
The last function we need to discuss is Direct Access. The [DIRECT ACCESS] button lets you jump directly to pages with particularly useful settings.
When you press [DIRECT ACCESS], the “Press a button to display
corresponding settings” message will appear in the LCD display.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
This message will remain onscreen for about three seconds. Press the
button corresponding to the settings you want to display before the message disappears.
Here is a list of pages you can access with Direct Access:
[DIRECT ACCESS] plus:
[VOCAL HARMONY]
[ACMP ASSIST]
[HARMONY]
[ACMP ON]
[METRONOME]
Any VOICE button
[DUAL]
[SPLIT]
[REVERB](4)
[CHORUS]
[EFFECT](4)
[1], [2], [3], or [4]
[REGISTRATION]
Displays:
VOCAL HARMONY (CVP-109/107/700)
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
METRONOME
KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] (1)
KEYBOARD [RIGHT2](2)
KEYBOARD [LEFT](3)
KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]
KEYBOARD [LEFT]
NATURAL REVERB (CVP-109)
REVERB
REVERB DEPTH
CHORUS
EFFECT 1 (CVP-109/107/700)
EFFECT 2 (CVP-109/107/700)
EFFECT (CVP-105)
REGISTRATION [NAME]
REGISTRATION [FREEZE]
See page:
176
81
87
71
28
36
36
36
39
42
47
47
50
52
55
55
58
111
110
You can also press an appropriate button
while holding down the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.
(1)
When RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in
the main display.
(2)
When RIGHT2 VOICE is selected in
the main display.
(3)
When LEFT VOICE is selected in the
main display.
(4)
Selects whichever page was most
recently displayed.
● A Word about Messages
For ease of operation, the Clavinova displays various messages (like the message displayed by the Direct
Access function as described above) that either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or inform you that the last operation is not effective, valid, or appropriate. When such messages appear, follow the
instructions as shown. For details about each message, please refer to the “Messages” section on page 221.
● Saving Your Changes
Now that you’ve started learning how to change the Clavinova’s settings, you may be wondering whether it
will remember the changes you’ve made even after you’ve turned the power off. The answer is yes — but you
need to tell it which settings you want it to remember.
By default, the Clavinova will not remember most of your setting changes. You have two ways to tell it which
settings you want to remember:
• You can register your settings with the Registration function (page 108). Once you have registered your
settings, you can restore them at any time by pressing a couple of buttons.
• You can instruct the Clavinova to remember certain settings when the power is off, and recall these settings
when you turn the power back on. To do this, you need to change the settings of the Backup function (page 206).
CVP-109/107/105/700
20
22
Adjusting the Volume
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova has two sliders that let you adjust the overall volume
and the accompaniment or song playback volume. There are also
settings that you can use to adjust the keyboard volume and the
volume of each part of the automatic accompaniment or song.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
STYLE
MAX
MAX
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
MIN
Adjusting the Overall Volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME]
slider to set the overall volume of
the Clavinova.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
• The [MASTER VOLUME] slider also
determines the output level of the
signal at the [PHONES] jack.
• Signals input to the AUX IN jacks are
also affected by the [MASTER VOLUME] setting; however, signals output
via the AUX OUT jacks are not.
Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to set the playback
volume of the automatic accompaniment and songs.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
This control has no effect on the volume
of your keyboard performance.
Setting the Keyboard Volume
21
Select KBD VOL in the main
display, then use the data dial or
the [–] and [+] buttons to change
the keyboard volume.
CVP-109/107/105/700
23
Adjusting the Volume
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○
Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels
Call up the MIXER display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer display,
the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a song can
be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the previous
display.
There are two types of mixer display, as shown below.
● Automatic Accompaniment Mixer
This MIXER display appears when you’re not using
the Song mode. See “Adjusting Individual Part Levels”
(page 77) for details.
● Song Mixer
CVP-109/107/700
This MIXER display
appears in the Song mode.
See “Adjusting Individual
Track Levels” (page 120) for
details.
Using an Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700)
You can control the volume of your keyboard performance with your
foot, by connecting the optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller to the
[EXP.PEDAL] jack of the Clavinova.
Press the pedal down to increase
the volume.
R
CVP-109/107/105/700
VID
OU
22
24
EXP.
PEDAL
Adjusting the Timbre
(CVP-109/107/700)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
You can adjust the sound timbre of the CVP-109/107/700 using
the Master Equalizer function.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
VOCAL
HARMONY
CUSTOM
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
DISK IN USE
PIANO
E. PIANO
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
GUITAR
STRINGS/
CHOIR
MASTER
EQUALIZER
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Changing the Master Equalizer Settings
Z Call up the MASTER EQUALIZER display. .............................
Press the [MASTER EQUALIZER] button. The button’s lamp
lights, and the MASTER EQUALIZER display appears. You can use the
five-band equalizer in this display to fine-adjust the timbre of the sound.
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
X Select the type of equalization. .........................................................
Use the left and right LCD buttons to select the equalizer setup that
you will use as the basis for your settings. Six different setups are available: FLAT, JAZZ, POPS, ROCK, CLASSIC, and STANDARD.
➔ The lowest band for the selected setup is selected, and the gain
for that band is displayed by the GAIN function.
23
80 Hz band selected
Equalizer setup
Basic setting: STANDARD
The gain becomes 0 for all frequencies
when FLAT is selected.
Gain
CVP-109/107/105/700
25
Adjusting the Timbre (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
C Select the band to be adjusted. ........................................................
Select the band you wish to adjust by pressing the BAND < or >
buttons.
➔
The central frequency of the selected band (expressed in Hz) is
displayed by the BAND function.
V Change the gain value. ...............................................................................
Change the value of the gain either by pressing the GAIN ▼ and ▲
buttons, or by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
➔ The new value is shown in the GAIN section of the display.
Since the value can be changed during playback, you can adjust the
settings while listening to the changes in the sound.
When you change a gain value, an asterisk (*) will appear near the
name of the selected equalizer setup to indicate that the settings have
been changed. By default, these settings will not be retained when the
power is turned off. If you want the Clavinova to retain your settings
while the power is off, you can turn on the BACKUP function for the
VOICE SETTING parameter group (page 206).
Gain
• Settings: –12 — 0 — +12 (dB)
• Basic setting: varies depending on
equalizer setup and band.
• Backup of last settings: OFF
• Distortion could result if the gain is set
to higher levels. If this happens, reduce the overall volume with the [MASTER VOLUME] control.
Using the Equalizer Lock Function
When equalizer setting values are contained in the song data, or when the
equalizer setting data is received via MIDI, the current settings in the MASTER EQUALIZER display will be overridden by the settings of the song
data or MIDI data. Set EQ LOCK to ON to prevent reception of this data, or
OFF to enable reception.
CVP-109/107/105/700
24
26
EQ LOCK
• Settings: ON, OFF
• Basic setting: OFF
Using the Metronome
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova features a convenient metronome that is ideal for practicing. The
procedure for setting the metronome tempo can also be used to set the playback
tempo for the Auto Accompaniment (page 63) and Song (page 113) modes.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
METRONOME
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Using the Metronome
You can start the metronome and set the tempo from any display, including
the main display.
■ Starting and Stopping the Metronome .......................................
To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button.
TEMPO
METRONOME
RESET
➔ The [METRONOME] lamp lights, and the metronome starts keeping
time (indicated by the flashing of the BEAT lamps).
• The metronome can also be used
during playback in Auto Accompaniment (page 63) or Song mode
(page 113).
• The metronome cannot be used
when playing disk software that
was recorded in free-tempo (see
page 116).
BEAT
TEMPO
METRONOME
RESET
Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome.
■ Adjusting the Tempo ......................................................................................
The current tempo, indicated in the upper left corner of the display, depends on the selected style (see page 62). To change the tempo, press the
TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons.
TEMPO
METRONOME
Restoring the Basic Tempo
You can restore the preset tempo for
the currently selected style by simultaneously pressing both TEMPO [–]
and [+] buttons.
RESET
Slower
Faster
➔ The tempo indication in the main display is highlighted, and the
tempo changes.
You can either press TEMPO [–] or [+] buttons briefly to change the
tempo value by one, or hold down the button to change it continuously.
When the tempo is highlighted in the display, you can also use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to set the tempo.
25
Tempo
• Range: 32 — 280
• Basic setting: Depends on style.
During Style or Song Playback…
• If a style or song is started while the
metronome is playing, the metronome will continue to sound along
with the style or song.
• The metronome uses the time signature of the style or song instead of
the BEAT setting during style or
song playback.
• The metronome stops when the
style or song stops.
CVP-109/107/105/700
27
Using the Metronome
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Changing the Metronome Settings
You can change the metronome’s time signature and volume using the
settings in the METRONOME page.
■ Displaying the Metronome Settings ..............................................
To display the METRONOME page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then
[METRONOME].
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
TEMPO
METRONOME
RESET
➔ The METRONOME display appears.
■ Setting the Beat (Time Signature) ....................................................
Use the BEAT ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the time signature. (If the BEAT
function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the
[–] and [+] buttons.)
When NORMAL is selected, the metronome ticks steadily at the current
tempo with no accented beats.
When BEAT is set to 2, 3, 4, or 5, the metronome ticks off measures with the
selected number of beats, playing a bell sound on the first beat of each measure.
BEAT
• Settings: NORMAL, 2 — 5
• Basic setting: NORMAL
■ Setting the Metronome Volume ..........................................................
Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the metronome volume.
(If the VOLUME function is highlighted, you can also change its settings
with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.)
VOLUME
• Range: 0 — 127
• Basic setting: 64
The volume of the metronome is determined by both the VOLUME function and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider (except in Song mode, in
which case the volume of the metronome is not affected by the slider). If you
use the slider, the playback volume for the Automatic Accompaniment (page
62) will also be affected.
CVP-109/107/105/700
26
28
Using the Help Mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main
functions of the Clavinova. You can select help topics from a menu
displayed on the LCD, or press a button on the panel to get help
information related to that control.
STYLE
HELP
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Z Call up the Help mode. ...............................................................................
While the Help mode is active, no other
operations can be performed.
Press the [HELP] button.
DEMO
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
➔ The Help menu display appears.
X Select the language if necessary. ...................................................
27
Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, JAPANESE, GERMAN, FRENCH, or SPANISH) by pressing the fourth LCD button.
The selected language is always backed
up even after the power is turned off.
CVP-109/107/105/700
29
Using the Help Mode
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
C Select a help topic. .........................................................................................
Use the left LCD buttons or the ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to select one
of the following eight menu items.
Help Topics
• Basic Operations
• Demo Songs
• Voices
• Styles
• Accompaniment
• Song Playback
• Song Recording
• Functions
➔ The selected menu is highlighted.
➾ Press the LCD button under ENTER to enter your selection.
➔ The first page of the selected help information is displayed.
V Turn the pages and read the help information. ...............
Use the fourth LCD button to advance the page. You can also press
the third LCD button if you want to go back and read the previous page.
B Exit the Help topic. ..........................................................................................
Press the LCD button under EXIT to return to the Help menu. You
can select another menu item or panel button and read through other help
topics.
N Exit the Help mode. ........................................................................................
To exit the Help mode and to go back to the main display at any time,
simply press [HELP].
DEMO
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
CVP-109/107/105/700
28
30
3: Voices
CHAPTER
Selecting Voices
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including
piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a Keyboard
Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum and
percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.
VOICE
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
16BEAT
LATIN
VOICE
CONTRAST
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
MASTER
EQUALIZER
CUSTOM
METRONOME
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
E. PIANO
GUITAR
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
ORGAN
MAX
MIN
MIN
EASY PLAY
TAP
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
SYNCHRO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
ORGAN
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
XG
EFFECT
SIGNAL
MAX
SYNTHESIZER
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
GUITAR
PIANO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
XG
REGISTRATION
● Voice Types
• Clavinova Voices :
* For a list of the voices, see page 3 in the Reference Booklet.
224 (CVP-109/107/700)
195 (CVP-105)
• XG Voices:
480
• Organ Flutes Voices: 6 (CVP-109/107/700)
• Drum/SFX Kits:
13 (CVP-109/107/700)
12 (CVP-105)
* The Clavinova’s voices are divided into twelve groups, corresponding to the twelve VOICE buttons on the panel.
Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display
Z Select the voice group. ............................................................................
Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE
button.
➔ The VOICE SELECT display appears.
Exiting the Display
To return to the main display, press [EXIT].
29
VOICE
PIANO
E. PIANO
GUITAR
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
Backing Up the Selected Voice
• When the power is turned ON, the Grand
Piano voice is selected automatically.
However, if the Backup function (page
206) is set to ON, the last selected voice
will automatically be selected.
• The last selected voice in each group can
be retained in memory, even after turning
off the power, when the Backup function
(page 206) is set to ON.
CVP-109/107/105/700
31
Selecting Voices
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
X Select the voice. .................................................................................................
Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate left or right LCD
button. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons can be also used.
You can also select the voice by pressing the VOICE ▲ and ▼ buttons.
Some of the VOICE SELECT displays have several successive pages.
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the various pages.
C Play the selected voice. .............................................................................
Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
Automatic Voice-related Settings
Selecting a voice automatically selects
the best-suited reverb, chorus, effect,
and other settings for that particular
voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected by
using the VOICE SETTING function
(page 189).
Selecting Voices from the Main Display
You can also select a voice using the RIGHT1 VOICE function in the
main display.
Z Select the RIGHT1 VOICE function. ..............................................
If the RIGHT1 VOICE function is not already highlighted, press the
fourth LCD button to highlight it.
X Select the voice. ..................................................................................................
Select the voice using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can
also hold down RIGHT1 VOICE to advance the voice selection continuously. (When selecting a voice in this way, the voice can be selected not
only from a certain voice group but from all voices.)
C Play the voice. .......................................................................................................
Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
CVP-109/107/105/700
About XG Voices
Yamaha’s XG format is a major new
enhancement to the GM (General MIDI)
System Level 1 format. It provides for
more instrument sounds and variations,
as well as greater expressive control over
voices and effects. XG also ensures
compatibility with future instruments and
software.
• Press the [XG] button to display a
menu of XG voices.
• Press another VOICE button while
holding down the [XG] button to display a list of XG voices in the corresponding category.
30
32
About Ensemble Voices
The Clavinova’s ensemble voices are
rich, dual-like voices that you can play
without entering the Dual mode (page
38.) Press the [Ensemble] button to
display a menu of ensemble voices.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Selecting
Voices
Organ Flutes (CVP-109/107/700)
To call up the ORGAN FLUTES display, press the [ORGAN] button
and select Organ Flutes in the VOICE SELECT [ORGAN] display.
With the Organ Flutes function in this display, you can select from six
different kinds of organ sounds, and even create your own organ sounds
by editing these voices.
The edited voices can be backed up in
sets of six by setting VOICE SETTING to
ON (in the Function section’s Backup
parameter, page 206).
■ Selecting Organ Flutes Voices ............................................................
Select the desired voice by pressing the left/right LCD buttons in the
ORGAN FLUTES display.
➔ The settings of the selected voice are shown in the display.
An asterisk (*) appears next to the voice
name when the selected voice has been
already edited.
■ Editing Organ Flutes Voices ..................................................................
The editing features in this function let you recreate organ voices by
adjusting several footage settings, just as on conventional organs. Various organ voices can be created using the settings shown below.
● FOOTAGE display
• Footage volume settings (eight continuous voices corresponding to conventional organ footages)
• Rotary speaker effect speed setting (FAST or SLOW)
● ATTACK display
• Attack footage volume settings (three decay voices used as percussive
attack sounds)
• LENGTH setting (length of attack sound for decaying voices)
• RESPONSE setting (speed of sound starting for continuous voices)
• Attack mode setting (EACH or FIRST)
Rotary speed effect
A rich, swirling chorus effect, created by
actual rotation of a speaker.
Attack sound
A sharp, percussive sound at the beginning of a note.
Attack mode
The manner in which the attack sound is
output.
31
To create a percussive organ sound, adjust the volume of the decay
sound and the attack length of attack sound to appropriate settings, then
add them to the continuous voice. To recreate the sound of a pipe organ
with a slow attack, set the RESPONSE to a large value.
CVP-109/107/105/700
33
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Selecting Voices
■ Editing the Voice ...............................................................................................
Select the desired voice for editing, then set each parameter.
The ORGAN FLUTES display has two pages: [FOOTAGE] and [ATTACK]. Press the rightmost LCD button to change between the displays.
Press the PRESET button in each display to instantly return to the preedited voice.
● Making settings in the ORGAN FLUTES [FOOTAGE] display
Footage volume settings
Select the footage “bar” to be adjusted by using the CURSOR buttons, then set the volume by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
Setting the speed of the rotary speaker effect
Press the middle LCD button to change between FAST and SLOW.
To call up the [ATTACK] display, either
press ATTACK or press the CURSOR >
button when the cursor is at “1.”
• The FAST/SLOW function is only
displayed when an effect (page 54) is
being applied to the keyboard part
playing the Organ Flutes voice.
• If an effect type other than rotary
speaker is applied to a part playing the
Organ Flutes voice, the FAST/SLOW
function switches the effect variation
on or off (see page 56) instead of
adjusting the speaker modulation
speed.
● Voice Type and Volume Image (About Organ Footages)
The standard pitch is 8 feet. A setting of 4 feet is one octave higher
than 8 feet, 2 feet is two octaves higher, and 1 foot is three octaves
higher; 16 feet is one octave lower.
Continuous tones
4
,
Decay tones
2
,
,
,
8
,
1+ 1/3
,
5 +1/3
1
2+ 2/3
,
4
,
,
2+ 2/3
CVP-109/107/105/700
2-foot
2+2/3-foot
4-foot
1-foot
1+1/3-foot
2-foot
2-2/3-foot
4-foot
5+1/3-foot
,
32
34
2
8-foot
16-foot
16
,
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Selecting
Voices
● Making Settings in the ORGAN FLUTES [ATTACK] Display
Attack footage volume and LENGTH and RESPONSE settings
Select the appropriate bar in the display by pressing the CURSOR
buttons, then set the volume, LENGTH, or RESPONSE by using the
data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
To call up the [FOOTAGE] display, either
press FOOTAGE or press the CURSOR
> button when the cursor is at “4.”
Setting the Attack Mode
Press the middle LCD button to change between the EACH and
FIRST settings. When set to EACH, the attack sound is applied to all
played notes.
When set to FIRST, the attack sound is applied only to the first
played note in a legato sequence, and is not applied to subsequent
notes played in legato.
● Image of Attack Length and Response
Continuous Tone
Volume
Decay Tone
Greater response time
Volume
Longer attack length
33
Time
Attack length
Time
CVP-109/107/105/700
35
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Selecting Voices
Keyboard Percussion
The Clavinova has eleven drum kits (ten on the CVP-105) and two
SFX kits, found on display pages 2 and 3 of the [PERCUSSION] voice
group. When one of the drum or SFX kits is selected, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting
you play the sounds from the keyboard.
The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard
Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys.
See the drum/SFX kit list on page 10 in the Reference Booklet for a
listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
• When a drum kit is selected, only the
keys with drum or percussion symbols
printed above them will sound.
• When an SFX kit is selected, keys
other than those which have been
assigned a special effect sound will not
produce any sound.
• The Transpose (page 188), Tune (page
188) and Octave (pages 37, 39 and 43)
functions do not affect the drum/SFX kits.
VOICE
PIANO
E. PIANO
GUITAR
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display page
to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the
RIGHT1 VOICE function.
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the RIGHT1
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
■ Displaying the Main Voice Keyboard Settings .................
Z If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, make sure RIGHT1
VOICE is selected in the main display.
X Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any of the VOICE buttons.
➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display appears.
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[RIGHT1] page and the [RIGHT2] (page
39) or [LEFT] (page 42) displays using
the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
VOICE
EXIT
CVP-109/107/105/700
➾
E. PIANO
GUITAR
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
34
36
DIRECT ACCESS
PIANO
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Selecting
Voices
■ Setting the Volume of the Main Voice ..........................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1]
page to change the volume of the main voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
Z Press the VOLUME button.
➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.
X Adjust the volume of the main voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
VOLUME
• Range: 0 — 127
• Basic setting: 127
■ Setting the Octave of the Main Voice ...........................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets
you adjust the pitch of the main voice up or down by one or two octaves.
Press the OCTAVE button.
➔ The value changes each time you press the button.
■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Main Voice ...................
OCTAVE
• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
• Basic setting: 0
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 189) to MANUAL.
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you
adjust the stereo position of the main voice.
Z Press the PAN button.
➔ The PAN function is highlighted.
X Adjust the stereo position.
35
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position,
or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
PAN
• Settings: L — ▼ — R
• Basic setting: ▼ (center)
CVP-109/107/105/700
37
Playing Two Voices
Simultaneously — Dual Mode
○○○○○○○○○○
The Dual mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two
different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to
create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. You can also set
the volume, octave, and stereo position for the second voice, and
detune the second voice from the main voice to create a thicker
sound.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
16BEAT
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
DUAL
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
MIN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
DIRECT ACCESS
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Selecting the Second Voice
Z Select the main voice. ..................................................................................
Select a voice in the normal way (page 31), then press [EXIT] to return to the main display.
X Call up the Dual mode. ................................................................................
To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button.
➔ The RIGHT2 VOICE function appears in the lower right corner of
the LCD display, and the current second voice is displayed below
and to the right of the main voice (after the plus sign).
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
C Select the second voice. ..........................................................................
Select the second voice in the same manner as described for the main
voice (page 31). To select the second voice, the RIGHT2 VOICE function must be highlighted.
Second Voice
• Range: All voices
• Basic setting: StringsSlow
Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode
To change the main voice while playing in Dual mode, select the
RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal
manner.
CVP-109/107/105/700
36
38
If you use the VOICE buttons to select a
voice while either the tempo or the KBD
VOL function is highlighted, the voice you
select will be used as the main voice.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing
Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page
to change the volume, octave, pan, and detune of the voice selected using
the RIGHT2 VOICE function.
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the RIGHT2
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
■ Displaying the Second Voice Keyboard Settings ...........
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [DUAL].
➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display appears.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
If the RIGHT2 VOICE function is selected
in the main display, you can also display
the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page by
pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by
any one of the VOICE buttons.
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[RIGHT2] page and the [RIGHT1] (page
36) or [LEFT] (page 42) displays using
the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
■ Setting the Volume of the Second Voice ..................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]
page to change the volume of the second voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
Z Press the VOLUME button.
➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.
X Adjust the volume of the second voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
■ Setting the Octave of the Second Voice ...................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets
you adjust the pitch of the second voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button.
37
➔ The value changes each time you press the button.
VOLUME
• Range: 0 — 127
• Basic setting: 127
OCTAVE
• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
• Basic setting: 0
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 189) to MANUAL.
CVP-109/107/105/700
39
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Second Voice ...........
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you
adjust the stereo position of the second voice.
Z Press the PAN button.
➔ The PAN function is highlighted.
PAN
• Settings: L — ▼ — R
• Basic setting: ▼ (center)
X Adjust the stereo position.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or
hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
■ Detuning the Second Voice ...................................................................
The DETUNE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page
lets you detune the pitch of the second voice slightly from that of the
main voice, to produce an even richer sound.
Z Press the DETUNE button.
➔ The DETUNE function is highlighted.
DETUNE
• Range: 0 — 10
• Basic setting: 5
X Adjust the detune depth.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the detune depth, or
hold down the DETUNE button to increase the detune depth.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Exiting the Dual Mode
Press the [DUAL] button to exit Dual mode.
➔ The [DUAL] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer
plays in Dual mode.
DUAL
CVP-109/107/105/700
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
38
40
SPLIT
Playing Two Voices on Different
Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
○○○○○○
The Split mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two
different voices with each hand. For example, you can play the
bass with your left hand and the piano with your right hand.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
SPLIT
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
MIN
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
DIRECT ACCESS
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Selecting the Left Voice
Z Select the main voice. ...................................................................................
Select a voice in the normal way (page 31), then press [EXIT] to return to the main display. The voice you select will be played by the right
range of the keyboard.
X Call up the Split mode. .................................................................................
To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button.
➔ The LEFT VOICE function appears in the bottom center of the LCD
display, and the current left voice is displayed below and to the
right of the main voice (after the slash). Also, the keyboard guide
lamp corresponding to the split point lights.
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
Split point
The split point is the key that divides the
right and left sides of the keyboard. You
can change the split point using the
SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page (page 43).
You can use the Single Finger, Multi
Finger, Fingered1, or Fingered2 modes
(page 72) of the Automatic Accompaniment function while playing in Split
mode. In this case, pressing the keys in
the left range will play the Automatic
Accompaniment voices as well as the left
voice.
C Select the left voice. ........................................................................................
39
Select the left voice in the same manner as described for the main
voice (page 31). To select the left voice, the LEFT VOICE function must
be highlighted.
Left Voice
• Range: All voices
• Basic setting: Acous.Bass 1
CVP-109/107/105/700
41
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
○○○○○○○○
Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode
To change the main voice while playing in Split mode, select the
RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner.
If you use the VOICE buttons to select a
voice while either the tempo or the KBD
VOL function is highlighted, the voice you
select will be used as the main voice.
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page to
change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the LEFT
VOICE function. You can also select the keyboard range that is affected
by the pedals, as well as the split point that separates the right and left
ranges, using the functions in this page.
■ Displaying the Left Voice Keyboard Settings ....................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [SPLIT].
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the LEFT
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
If the LEFT VOICE function is selected in
the main display, you can also display
the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page by pressing
[DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one
of the VOICE buttons.
➔ The KEYBOARD [LEFT] display appears.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[LEFT] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 36)
or [RIGHT2] (page 39) displays using the
PAGE [<] and [>]buttons.
■ Setting the Volume of the Left Voice ...........................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page
to change the volume of the left voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
Z Press the VOLUME button.
➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.
X Adjust the volume of the left voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
CVP-109/107/105/700
40
42
VOLUME
• Range: 0 — 127
• Basic setting: 127
○○○○○○○○
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
■ Setting the Octave of the Left Voice .............................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you
adjust the pitch of the left voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press
the OCTAVE button.
➔ The value changes each time you press the button.
■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Left Voice ......................
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the left voice.
OCTAVE
• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
• Basic setting: +1
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 189) to MANUAL.
Z Press the PAN button.
➔ The PAN function is highlighted.
X Adjust the stereo position.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or
hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
■ Setting the Range Affected by the Right and Left
Pedals .........................................................................................................................
The PEDAL function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you
specify which ranges of the keyboard will be affected by the damper,
glide, and pitch bend functions (CVP-109/107/700) controlled by the left
and right pedals when playing in Split mode. Press the PEDAL button.
PAN
• Settings: L — ▼ — R
• Basic setting: ▼ (center)
PEDAL
• Settings: R (right only)
L (left only)
L+R (both)
• Basic setting: R
See pages 190 and 191 for a list of the
functions that can be controlled by the
left and right pedals.
➔ The value changes each time you press the button.
■ Changing the Split Point ............................................................................
You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT]
display to set the split point at any desired key position. In Split mode, the
left voice is played by all keys to the left of (and including) the split point.
The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2.
SPLIT POINT
• Settings: Any key of the keyboard
• Basic setting: F#2
F 2
Left range
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
41
Right range
CVP-109/107/105/700
43
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
○○○○○○○○○○
Z Press the SPLIT POINT button.
➔ The SPLIT function is highlighted.
X Change the split point.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point, or hold
down the SPLIT POINT button to move the split point to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
➔ The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point
lights, and the key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.
C3
Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously
The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously.
When you do so, the right range of the keyboard will play both the main
voice and the second voice.
Exiting the Split Mode
Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode.
➔ The [SPLIT] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays
in Split mode.
DUAL
CVP-109/107/105/700
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
42
44
SPLIT
Using the Pedals
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
The Clavinova has three pedals.
Damper Pedal (Right)
The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an
actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after
releasing the keys. On the CVP-109/107/700, you can also set the damper
pedal to bend the pitch of notes up or down using the RIGHT PEDAL function (page 191).
• Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]
and [XG] groups may not be affected
by use of the damper pedal.
• Some voices may sound continuously
or have a long decay after the notes
have been released while the damper
pedal is held.
Sostenuto Pedal (Center)
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto
pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as
the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained.
This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes
are played staccato.
• Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]
and [XG] groups may not be affected
by use of the sostenuto pedal.
• Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or
[BRASS], sustain continuously when
the sostenuto pedal is pressed.
Soft Pedal (Left)
43
Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of
the notes you play.
You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for example, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or use it to
play Fill Ins. See page 190 for details.
The effect of the soft pedal may differ
slightly depending on the selected voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
45
4: Reverb and Other
CHAPTER
Reverb
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space —
anything from a room in a jazz club to a concert hall. The Clavinova lets you choose
from a variety of reverb effects; the CVP-109 gives you the additional option of using
the high-quality Natural Reverb — effects of a caliber normally employed in professional recording studios. Of course, you can set the depth of any reverb effect to your
preference. With the CVP-109/107/700, you can also apply reverb effects to the signal
from the microphone using the Vocal Harmony settings (see page 177).
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
REVERB
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Turning the Reverb On or Off
To apply reverb to the keyboard part(s), press the [REVERB] button.
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The lamp lights, and the reverb icon “
” appears in the main display,
followed by the name of the currently selected reverb type.
Reverb ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
The setting of the [REVERB] button has
no effect on song mode or Auto Accompaniment playback, or on audio signals
input via a microphone (CVP-109/107/
700).
Current reverb type
To turn the reverb off, press [REVERB] again.
➔ The lamp turns off, and the reverb icon and reverb type are no
longer displayed.
Because the basic setting of the [REVERB] button depends on the
voice, the reverb may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
44
46
Effects
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Reverb
Changing the Reverb Settings
You can change the reverb type and depth using the REVERB and
REVERB DEPTH display pages. With the CVP-109, you can also select
a Natural Reverb effect from the NATURAL REVERB page.
■ Displaying the Reverb Settings .........................................................
Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB
DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).
CVP-107/700
If you are using the CVP-109, the LCD will display the NATURAL
REVERB page, the REVERB page, or the REVERB DEPTH page.
CVP-109
45
X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the NATURAL
REVERB page (CVP-109), the REVERB page, and the REVERB
DEPTH page.
On the CVP-109, the NATURAL
REVERB display is page 1; the REVERB
and REVERB DEPTH pages are numbered 2 and 3, respectively.
If you press the [>] button while the
REVERB DEPTH page is showing, the
CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer
to the other sections of this chapter for
details on chorus and other effect settings.
CVP-109/107/105/700
47
Reverb
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Changing the Natural Reverb Type (CVP-109) ...............
You can change the Natural Reverb type selection in the NATURAL
REVERB display (page 47).
Use the left LCD buttons to select the desired Natural Reverb type.
You can also select a Natural Reverb type with the REVERB TYPE ▲
and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.
➔ The selected Natural Reverb type is highlighted.
Because the basic setting of the Natural Reverb type depends on the
current RIGHT1 VOICE setting, the Natural Reverb type may change
automatically when you select a different main voice (see page 31).
Natural Reverb Type
• Settings: See table on page 218.
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
• The Natural Reverb type selection
affects all keyboard parts that use
Natural Reverb. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
• The depth of the Natural Reverb effect
can be set separately for each part that
uses the effect (page 50).
• Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
reverb type is selected.
■ Changing the Reverb System (CVP-109) .................................
You can assign each keyboard part to use either the Natural Reverb
system or normal reverb using the functions in the NATURAL REVERB
display (page 47).
Press the LCD button corresponding to the keyboard part whose
reverb system you want to change. Select LEFT to change the reverb
system for the left part, RIGHT1 for the main part, or RIGHT2 for the
second part.
➔ The selected function switches between REV and N.REV.
Reverb System
Settings: N.REV (Natural Reverb),
REV (normal reverb)
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
• If you switch a part to N.REV, it will
use the Natural Reverb type selected
in the NATURAL REVERB display.
• If you switch a part to REV, it will use
the reverb type selected in the
REVERB display.
Because the basic settings of the reverb system functions depend on
the current voice selection, these settings may change automatically
when you select a different voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
46
48
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Reverb
■ Changing the Reverb Type .....................................................................
You can change the reverb type using the REVERB display (page 47).
Use the REVERB TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the reverb type,
or select the REVERB TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and
[+] buttons. (You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select
one of the reverb types listed in the display.)
➔ The selected reverb type is highlighted.
CVP-107/700
Reverb Type
• Settings: See table on page 218.
• Basic setting: Depends on style.
• The reverb type selection affects all
voices played by the keyboard or Auto
Accompaniment. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
• Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
reverb type is selected.
• The reverb effect cannot be applied to
the sounds input through the AUX IN
[R] and [L/L+R] jacks.
• It is also possible to apply reverb effects to the keyboard voices using the
[EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type
List on page 219 for details.
• If both the [REVERB] button and the
[CHORUS] and/or [EFFECT] buttons
are turned on, all effects will be applied.
Because the basic setting of the reverb type depends on the accompaniment style, the reverb type may change automatically when you select
a different style.
■ Setting the Total Depth ................................................................................
The overall depth of the selected reverb effect(s) can be set using the
TOTAL DEPTH function in the REVERB display (page 47).
Z Select the TOTAL DEPTH function.
➔ The TOTAL DEPTH function is highlighted.
On the CVP-109, the TOTAL DEPTH
setting determines the depth of both the
Natural Reverb and normal reverb effects.
TOTAL DEPTH
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 64
X Set the total depth of the reverb effect(s).
47
You can change the setting using the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.
To reset the value to the basic setting of 64, simultaneously press
either the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.
• The TOTAL DEPTH setting globally
affects all voices. Different settings
cannot be made for each voice.
• You can also set the reverb depth
separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, and for each keyboard
part. (See the next operation.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
49
Reverb
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Setting the Reverb Depth for Each Part ....................................
The settings in the REVERB DEPTH display (page 47) let you set the
reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, as well
as the parts you play from the keyboard.
Z Select a part.
Press the LCD button corresponding to RHYTHM to set the reverb
depth for the drum part, or ACMP to set it for all other accompaniment parts. Select LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the reverb
depth for the corresponding keyboard part.
➔ The selected function is highlighted.
• You can also select several parts at
once and adjust their settings simultaneously.
• On the CVP-109, the LEFT, RIGHT1,
and RIGHT2 settings also set the
depth of the Natural Reverb effects.
CVP-107/700
X Set the reverb depth.
Set the reverb depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
Because the basic settings of the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 functions depend on the voices selected, a reverb depth setting may
change automatically when you select a different part.
CVP-109/107/105/700
LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
The amount of reverb that is applied to a
part depends on both the part depth and
TOTAL DEPTH settings. If one of the
settings is 0, no reverb will be applied to
that part even if the other setting is 127.
48
50
RHYTHM and ACMP
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 64
Chorus
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova’s chorus effects let you modify the voices you play from the keyboard,
adding warmth for an even richer sound. Flanger effects add pronounced modulation,
for a spacy futuristic quality. You can choose from a variety of chorus and flanger
effects, and set the depth of the effect added to each keyboard voice. With the CVP109/107/700, you can also apply the selected chorus effect to the signal from the
microphone using the Vocal Harmony settings (see page 178).
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
CHORUS
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Turning the Chorus On or Off
To apply chorus to the keyboard part(s), press the [CHORUS] button.
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The lamp lights, and the chorus icon “
” appears in the main
display, followed by the name of the currently selected chorus type.
Chorus ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
The setting of the [CHORUS] button has
no effect on song mode or Auto Accompaniment playback, or on audio signals
input via a microphone (CVP-109/107/
700).
Current chorus type
To turn the chorus off, press [CHORUS] again.
➔ The lamp turns off, and the chorus icon and chorus type are no
longer displayed.
49
Because the basic setting of the [CHORUS] button depends on the
voice, the chorus may turn on or off automatically when you select a
different voice.
You can change the current chorus type and depth using the CHORUS display page.
CVP-109/107/105/700
51
Chorus
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Changing the Chorus Settings
■ Displaying the Chorus Settings .....................................................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [CHORUS] to display the CHORUS display page.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The LCD displays the CHORUS page.
CVP-107/700
If you press the [<] button or the [>]
button while the CHORUS page is showing, the REVERB DEPTH page or the
EFFECT 1 page (the EFFECT page on
the CVP-105) will be displayed. Refer to
the other sections of this chapter for
details on reverb and other effect settings.
■ Changing the Chorus Type ....................................................................
You can change the chorus type selection in the CHORUS page. Select the chorus type using the left and right LCD buttons.
You can also change the chorus type using the CHORUS TYPE ▲
and ▼ buttons, or by selecting the CHORUS TYPE function and using
the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Chorus Type
• Settings: See table on page 219.
• Basic setting: Depends on style.
➔ The selected chorus type is highlighted.
CVP-107/700
Because the basic setting of the chorus type depends on the accompaniment style, the chorus type may change automatically when you select
a different style.
CVP-109/107/105/700
50
52
• The chorus type selection affects all
keyboard parts. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
• Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
chorus type is selected.
• It is also possible to apply chorus
effects to the keyboard voices using
the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect
Type List on page 219 for details.
• If both the [CHORUS] button and the
[REVERB] and/or [EFFECT] buttons
are turned on, all effects will be applied.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Chorus
■ Setting the Chorus Depth for Each Part ...................................
The other settings in the CHORUS page let you set the chorus depth
separately for each part you play from the keyboard.
Z Select a part.
Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the chorus depth for the
corresponding keyboard part.
You can also select several parts at once
and adjust their settings simultaneously.
➔ The selected function is highlighted.
CVP-107/700
X Set the chorus depth.
51
Set the chorus depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
Because the basic settings of the chorus depth functions depend on
the voices selected, a chorus depth setting may change automatically
when you select a different voice.
Chorus Depth functions
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
53
Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus that you can use to
enhance the sound of the voices or create wild, special effects. The CVP-109/107/700
features two complete effect systems, which you can apply individually to any of the
voices you play from the keyboard. You can adjust the depth of the effects as desired.
The CVP-109/107/700 also applies an independent effect to the signal from the
microphone; settings for this effect system can be made in the VOCAL HARMONY
display (page 179).
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
EFFECT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
START/STOP
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Turning the Effects On or Off
You can use the [EFFECT] button to turn effects on or off for the
keyboard parts.
Z Select a part in the main display. ....................................................
If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, press the LCD button
corresponding to the keyboard part whose effect you want to turn on.
➔ The selected function is highlighted.
• Only the effect system assigned to the
currently selected keyboard part is
affected when you press the [EFFECT]
button.
• To turn both effect systems (page 55)
on or off, you must perform this operation twice, selecting each of the affected parts in turn.
X Press the [EFFECT] button. ...................................................................
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The lamp lights, and the effect icon “
” appears in the main display, followed by the name of the currently selected effect type.
Effect ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
If both of the effect systems (page 55)
are assigned to the same part, only the
effect type selected in the EFFECT 1
page will be displayed.
Current effect type
CVP-109/107/105/700
52
54
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Voice
Effects (CVP-109/107/700)
If the lamp does not light, neither effect system has been assigned to
the part in question. Check the PART function settings (page 57).
If the lamp lights but the sound of the voice does not change, the effect
depth may have been set to 0. Check the effect depth settings (page 57).
To turn an effect off, select the part that uses that effect in the main
display and press [EFFECT] again.
➔ The lamp turns off, and the effect icon and effect type are no
longer displayed.
Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the
voice, the effect(s) may turn on or off automatically when you select a
different voice.
• The setting of the [EFFECT] button
has no effect on song mode or Auto
Accompaniment playback, or on audio
signals input via a microphone (CVP109/107/700).
• When an effect system is used by a
song, it is automatically turned off for
the keyboard part(s) when that song is
selected for playback. If you press
[EFFECT] to apply an effect to the
keyboard part(s) after selecting the
song, the effect will not be applied to
the song.
Changing the Effect Settings
You can change the effect type, depth and affected part using the settings on the EFFECT pages.
■ Displaying the Effect Settings .............................................................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT] to display the EFFECT
display pages.
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
➔ The LCD displays either the EFFECT 1 page or the EFFECT 2 page
(whichever was selected most recently).
CVP-107/700
53
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EFFECT 1
page and the EFFECT 2 page.
If you press the [<] button while the
EFFECT 1 page is showing, the CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer to the
first two sections of this chapter for details on reverb and chorus settings.
CVP-109/107/105/700
55
Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
■ Changing the Effect Type ..........................................................................
You can change the effect type selection for one of the effect systems
in the appropriate EFFECT display (page 55). Select an effect type using
the EFFECT TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE
function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select one of the
effect types listed in the display screen.
To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
EFFECT TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Effect Type
• Settings: See table on page 219.
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
➔ The selected effect type is highlighted.
Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the
effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.
If both the [EFFECT] button and the
[REVERB] and/or [CHORUS] buttons are
turned on, all effects will be applied.
■ Varying the Effect .............................................................................................
Each of the Clavinova’s effect types has a variation that can be selected using the VARIATION functions in the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT
2 displays (page 55). To vary the effect produced by the effect type selected for an effect system, display the EFFECT page for that system,
then press the LCD button under VARIATION.
VARIATION
• Settings: OFF, ON
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
➔ The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches between OFF and ON, and the effect changes.
The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see
the table on page 219). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIATION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may
change automatically when you select a different voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
54
56
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○
Voice Effects (CVP-109/107/700)
■ Setting the Affected Part .................................................................................
You can use the PART function in each EFFECT display to select the keyboard part that is to be affected by the corresponding effect system. To change
the part affected by one of the effect systems, display the EFFECT page for
that system, then press the LCD button under PART.
➔ The value of the PART function changes, displaying each of the
settings (R1, R2, LEFT, and OFF) in turn.
Since the changing the value of the PART function means the effect
will probably be applied to a different voice, the effect type (page 56)
and effect depth (see below) may also change automatically to match the
voice that is currently selected for the chosen part.
PART
Settings: R1 (main)
R2 (second)
LEFT
OFF (no effect)
Basic settings: R1 (EFFECT 1)
R2 (EFFECT 2)
When neither effect system has been
assigned to the keyboard part that is
currently selected in the main display, the
[EFFECT] button cannot be used to turn
an effect on.
■ Setting the Effect Depth .............................................................................
The DEPTH function in each of the EFFECT pages lets you adjust the
depth of the currently selected effect type. To set the depth of the effect
produced by an effect system, select DEPTH in the appropriate EFFECT
page, then and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the value.
DEPTH
• Range: 0 (no effect) - 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
➔ The DEPTH value changes.
The effect depth cannot be changed for
certain effect types. In such cases a row
of dashes ( - - -) is displayed as the
DEPTH setting, and the DEPTH function
cannot be selected.
55
You can also advance the value by holding down the DEPTH button.
To reset the value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [–] and
[+] buttons.
Since the basic setting of the DEPTH function depends on the voice
selected for the part affected by the effect system in question, the effect
depth may change automatically when you select a different voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
57
Voice Effects (CVP-105)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus
that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild,
special effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect as desired.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
EFFECT
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Turning the Effects On
To apply the effect to the keyboard parts, press the [EFFECT] button.
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
Effect ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
EFFECT
➔ The lamp lights, and the effect icon “
” appears in the main display, followed by the name of the currently selected effect type.
Current effect type
To turn the effect off, press [EFFECT] again.
➔ The lamp turns off, and the effect icon and effect type are no
longer displayed.
The [EFFECT] lamp will not light if the
effect depth (page 60) is set to 0.
When the effect system is also used by
an accompaniment style or song, the
effect being applied to the keyboard
part(s) may automatically be turned off
when you start the Auto Accompaniment
or select the song for playback, depending on the effect type selected by the
style or song. If this happens, you may
be able to apply the effect to the keyboard part(s) by pressing the [EFFECT]
button - again, this depends on the selected effect type. If you do so, the effect
will not be applied to voices played by the
Auto Accompaniment or song.
Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the
voice, the effect may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice.
Changing the Effect Settings
You can change the current effect type and depth using the EFFECT
display pages.
■ Displaying the Effect Settings ............................................................
ZPress [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT].
EXIT
CVP-109/107/105/700
➾
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
56
58
DIRECT ACCESS
If you press the [<] button while the first
EFFECT page is showing, the CHORUS
page will be displayed. Refer to the first
two sections of this chapter for details on
reverb and chorus settings.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Voice Effects (CVP-105)
➔ The LCD displays the EFFECT page that was used most recently.
X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EFFECT pages.
■ Changing the Effect Type .........................................................................
You can change the effect type selection in the first EFFECT page
(page 4 of the display). Select an effect type using the EFFECT TYPE ▲
and ▼ buttons, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE function and use the data
dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also use the left and right LCD buttons to select one of the
effect types listed in the display screen.
To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
EFFECT TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Effect Type
• Settings: See table on page 219.
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
➔ The selected effect type is highlighted.
57
Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the
effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.
• The effect type selection affects all
keyboard parts. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
• When the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button is ON for two or three
voices selected in Dual and/or Split
mode, the Clavinova will automatically
select the most appropriate effect type
and set the effect depth (page 60) for
each part to an appropriate level.
• Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
effect type is selected.
• If both the [EFFECT] button and the
[REVERB] and/or [CHORUS] buttons
are turned on, all effects will be applied.
CVP-109/107/105/700
59
Voice Effects (CVP-105)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Varying the Effect .............................................................................................
Each of the Clavinova’s effect types has a variation that can be selected using the VARIATION function in the first EFFECT page (page 4
of the display). To vary the effect produced by the selected effect type,
press the LCD button under VARIATION.
VARIATION function
• Settings: OFF, ON
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
➔ The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches between OFF and ON, and the effect changes.
The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see
the table on page 219). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIATION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may
change automatically when you select a different voice.
■ Setting the Effect Depth for Each Part .......................................
The settings in the second EFFECT page (page 5 of the display) let you
set the effect depth separately for each part you play from the keyboard.
Z Select a part.
Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the effect depth for the corresponding keyboard part.
➔ The selected function is highlighted.
X Set the effect depth.
Set the effect depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
Because the basic settings of the effect depth functions depend on the
voices selected, an effect depth setting may change automatically
when you select a different voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
58
60
Effect Depth functions
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: Depends on voice.
CHAPTER
5: Accompaniment Styles
(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)
Selecting Accompaniment Styles
○○○○○○
The Clavinova has a wide variety of musical “styles” that you can use for simple
percussion accompaniment, or as the basis of a fully orchestrated accompaniment
— including bass and rhythm parts — using the Auto Accompaniment feature (page
69). There is also a selection of “Pianist” styles that let you play with piano
accompaniment when you activate the Auto Accompaniment.
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
LATIN
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
SWING/
JAZZ
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
DISK
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
CUSTOM
● Style Types
• Rhythm styles: 157 (CVP-109)
147 (CVP-107/700)
135 (CVP-105)
• Pianist styles: 35
• Custom styles: 12
* For information on the styles, see the Style List on page 12 in the Reference Booklet.
* The Clavinova’s styles are divided into eleven groups, corresponding to
the eleven STYLE buttons on the panel.
* The PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group
do not include drum sounds. Use the Auto Accompaniment (page 70) to
play these styles.
Selecting a Style
Z Select an accompaniment style group. .....................................
Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE
button.
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
Disk and Custom Styles
The [DISK/CUSTOM] button lets you use
styles on optional Style File Disks (page
105) or your original styles (page 91) .
PIANIST
DISK
CUSTOM
➔ The corresponding STYLE SELECT display appears.
59
• The last selected style in each group
can be retained in memory, even after
turning off the power, when the Backup
function (page 206) is set to ON.
• When the power is turned on, the 8
Beat 1 style is automatically selected.
However, if the Backup function (page
206) is set to ON, the last selected
style will be selected instead.
• Accompaniment styles cannot be
selected in the Song Play mode (page
113).
CVP-109/107/105/700
61
Selecting Accompaniment Styles
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Select a style. ..........................................................................................................................
Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate left or right LCD button.
Accompaniment Tempo
• Whenever you select a style,
the preset tempo for that
style is also selected (unless
you change the style during
playback, in which case the
current tempo is maintained).
• Adjust the tempo as described on page 27.
Accompaniment Volume
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the playback volume, as described on
page 23.
PAGE
You can also select a style using the data dial, the [–] and [+] buttons, or the
STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons.
Some STYLE SELECT displays consist of more than one page. Use the
>] buttons to switch between pages.
PAGE [<] and [>
C Return to the main display .......................................................................................
Press [EXIT] to return to the main display.
EXIT
CVP-109/107/105/700
60
62
DIRECT ACCESS
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
○○○○○○
You will use the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons and the START/
STOP buttons to select style variations and control style playback.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MAIN A
INTRO
START/STOP
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
FADE
IN/OUT
ENDING
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
DISK IN USE
PIANO
E. PIANO
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
GUITAR
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
DIRECT ACCESS
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Varying the Style
Each of the Clavinova’s styles has four variations, corresponding to
the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons labeled as [MAIN A], [MAIN
B], [MAIN C], and [MAIN D].
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
Use these buttons to select style variations.
Main A is generally the most rudimentary form of the style; the other
variations are more or less lavish embellishments on the same basic
theme. By judiciously switching between variations as you play, you can
add variety and make the performance more interesting.
■ Selecting a Variation ........................................................................................
You can select a style variation before you start playing the style. To
select a variation, simply press the corresponding button.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
➔ The button’s lamp lights.
The Clavinova will begin playing the selected style variation when
you start the style using one of the methods described in the next section.
■ Playing Fill-in Patterns ..................................................................................
61
If you select a different style variation while the style is playing, the
Clavinova will play an automatic fill-in pattern as it switches to the new
variation. The fill-in pattern, like the main pattern, is different for each
variation.
Fill-in patterns
A “fill-in pattern” is a embellishment of the
basic rhythm, usually played at the end of
a musical phrase as an exciting transition
into the next segment.
CVP-109/107/105/700
63
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
To change the variation while the style is playing, press the button
corresponding to the new variation.
➔ The button’s lamp flashes as the Clavinova plays the fill-in pattern.
Generally speaking, the Clavinova will start the fill-in pattern soon
after you press the button. If you select a variation after the last eighth
note of a measure, however, it will begin the fill-in pattern from the start
of the next measure.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to pause
the style or play a special fill-in pattern by
setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page
190) to BREAK or BREAK FIL.
➔ When the fill-in pattern is finished, the button’s lamp lights steadily
as the Clavinova plays the main pattern.
The auto fill-in feature provides an exciting transition as you switch
from one variation to another. If Main A is playing and you press [MAIN
B], for example, the Clavinova will play Fill-in B, then start playing
Main B.
You can also play fill-in patterns without
selecting a different variation. Just press
the button for the variation that is playing.
The Clavinova will play the fill-in for that
variation, then return to the main pattern.
■ More Fun With Fill-ins ....................................................................................
● Changing the Fill-in
It is possible to switch variations while a fill-in pattern is playing. The
Clavinova will switch to the fill-in pattern for the new variation, then
continue with the new main pattern as usual.
● Repeating the Fill-in
If you hold down the flashing button, or press it after the last eighth
note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the fill-in pattern will be repeated.
● Canceling the Fill-in
If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the
measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the Clavinova will stop
playing the fill-in pattern and continue with the main pattern.
Starting the Accompaniment Style
There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described
below:
■ Standard Start .........................................................................................................
This is the simplest way to start a style. If necessary, select a variation
as described on page 63, then press the [START/STOP] button.
START/STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
➔ The lamp lights and the style starts.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Beat Indicator
During style playback, the leftmost beat
lamp (red) flashes on the first beat of
each measure, and the other lamps
(green) flash for each successive beat.
The current tempo and measure number
are shown in the upper left corner of the
main display.
62
64
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to start
and stop the style by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 190) to START/
STOP.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Playing
the Accompaniment Styles
■ Synchronized Start ............................................................................................
This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord
on the keyboard.
Z Set the Synchronized Start function.
If necessary, select a variation as described on page 63, then press the
[SYNCHRO] button.
START/STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
• If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed
while a style is playing, style playback
stops and Synchronized Start is automatically set to stand-by.
• When you play the keyboard in Split
mode (page 41) or use the Auto Accompaniment in a mode other than
FULL KEYBOARD (page 73), only the
left-hand section of the keyboard will
trigger a synchronized start.
➔ The lamp lights, and the red [BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the
current tempo.
X Start playing.
When you are ready, play a note on the keyboard. The style starts
playing when you play the first note.
To cancel the Synchronized Start function before you start the style, press the
[SYNCHRO] button again.
➔ The [SYNCHRO] lamp turns off, the [START/STOP] lamp lights,
and the style starts.
■ Tap Start ........................................................................................................................
This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one operation.
If necessary, select a variation as described on page 63, then tap the
[TAP] button at the desired tempo. Tap four times for 2- and 4-beat
styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-beat styles.
If you do not tap the [TAP] button the
required number of times (i.e., 3 times for
a 3-beat style), the Tap Start function will
be canceled after a few seconds.
TEMPO
METRONOME
RESET
TAP
When playing a 4-beat style… ➾ Tap 4 times.
63
The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style
playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap “click” will
not sound.
CVP-109/107/105/700
65
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Adding an Introduction .................................................................................
This function lets you embellish the start of a tune by adding an introduction.
Z Set the introduction pattern.
Select the variation to play the intro pattern as described on page 63,
then press the [INTRO] button. There are three introduction patterns,
as shown below:
Intro Patterns
Pattern
Intro A
Intro B
Intro C/D
Played by:
[MAIN A]
[MAIN B]
[MAIN C] or [MAIN D]
➔ The [INTRO] lamp lights, and the lamp for the selected variation
flashes.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
The flashing light indicates the variation
that will play after the intro. In the illustration at left, the Clavinova will play Intro A,
followed by Main A.
X Select the main pattern.
Select the variation to play the main pattern when the intro is finished. (If you want the style to continue playing with the same variation as the introduction, you can skip this step.)
➔ The lamp for the previously selected button lights, and the lamp of
the selected button flashes.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
Since the flashing light indicates the
variation that will play after the intro, the
illustration at left indicates that the
Clavinova will play Intro C/D, followed by
Main A.
C Start the style.
Use one of the three methods described on the preceding pages to
start playing the style.
CVP-109/107/105/700
64
66
To cancel the introduction before starting
the style, press the [INTRO] button again.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Playing
the Accompaniment Styles
■ Fading In .............................................................................................................................
This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the style. You can
set the Fade In function at any time before you start the style, and use it in
combination with any start method (including the Introduction function).
Z Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 190) to FADE IN/
OUT.
START/STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
➔ The lamp lights, and the Synchronized Start function (page 65)
turns on automatically.
X Start the style.
Use one of the three methods described on the preceding page to start
playing the style.
To cancel the fade-in before starting the
style, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button
again.
➔ The [FADE IN/OUT] lamp flashes during the fade-in, then turns off
when the fade-in is completed.
Stopping the Accompaniment Style
There are also several ways to stop accompaniment style playback, as
described below:
■ Standard Stop .........................................................................................................
To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button.
START/STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
START/STOP
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to start
and stop the style by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 190) to START/
STOP.
➔ The lamp turns off and the style stops instantly.
■ Adding an Ending ...............................................................................................
To play an ending pattern before the style playback stops, press the
[ENDING] button.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
65
➔ The ENDING lamp lights, and the Clavinova stops style playback
after playing an ending pattern.
If you press the [ENDING] button on or
after the second beat of a measure, the
ending pattern will start at the top of the
next measure.
CVP-109/107/105/700
67
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova will play one of three ending patterns, depending on
the main pattern that is currently playing, as shown below.
Ending Patterns
Pattern
Ending A
Ending B
Ending C/D
Played by:
[MAIN A]
[MAIN B]
[MAIN C] or [MAIN D]
Press [ENDING] a second time while the ending pattern is playing to
produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) effect.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
the ending pattern and ritardando by
setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page
190) to ENDING/RIT.
■ Fading Out ..................................................................................................................
You can have the style fade out and automatically stop by pressing
the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
START/STOP
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 190) to FADE IN/
OUT.
START/STOP
➔ The lamp flashes as the style fades out.
You can use the Fade Out function in combination with any pattern
(including the Introduction and Ending functions).
CVP-109/107/105/700
66
68
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○ ○ ○ ○
The Clavinova includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment
system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord
backing for your performance in 157 different styles (147 styles
on the CVP-107/700; 135 on the CVP-105), as well as 35
different types of piano-only accompaniment.
The Auto Accompaniment playback data is normally not output by the
MIDI [OUT] terminal. To send the Auto Accompaniment data to another
MIDI instrument, use the ACMP&RHY and HARMONY functions in the
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display described on page 205.
ACMP ON
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
VOCAL
HARMONY
CUSTOM
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
DISK IN USE
PIANO
E. PIANO
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
GUITAR
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
DIRECT ACCESS
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Using the Auto Accompaniment
You can use one of several methods to indicate the chords that are to
be played by the Auto Accompaniment. Choose the accompaniment
mode that best suits your playing style.
Detailed explanations of each accompaniment mode are given on pages 72 and
73.
● Single Finger
The Single Finger method makes it easy to obtain accompaniment in
major, seventh, minor, and minor-seventh chords by pressing certain keys
(according to simple rules) to the left of the split point indicated by the
keyboard guide lamp. (See page 72.)
● Multi Finger
When you select the Multi Finger mode, you can use either the Single
Finger method or the Fingered 1 method to indicate chords for the accompaniment. (See page 72.)
● Fingered 1
The Fingered 1 method lets you control the Auto Accompaniment by
playing full chords to the left of the split point. (See page 72.)
● Fingered 2
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered 1 mode, with
the exception that the lowest note played to the left of the split point is
used as the bass root (in Fingered 1 mode, the root of the chord is always
used as the bass root). Hence, you can select this mode to play “on bass”
or “fraction” chords. (See page 73.)
67
● Full Keyboard
The Full Keyboard mode automatically produces appropriate automatic accompaniment for virtually anything you play, anywhere on the
keyboard. (See page 73.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
69
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Starting the Auto Accompaniment
You may want to select an accompaniment mode (page 71) before
you start playing. If the accompaniment mode is set to your liking, you
can start the Auto Accompaniment as follows:
Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................
Select the desired style. (See page 61.)
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
DISK
Pianist styles
You can play the PIANIST styles and
Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style
group with the Auto Accompaniment
(page 61). Since these styles do not
contain drum parts, you’ll have to indicate
a chord as you start the style to hear the
accompaniment.
CUSTOM
X Set the tempo and accompaniment volume. ......................
Use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo (page 27), and the
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume of the accompaniment parts (page 23).
C Turn on the Auto Accompaniment. ...............................................
Press the [ACMP ON] button.
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
➔ The [ACMP ON] lamp lights, and the current accompaniment
mode is indicated at the left edge of the main display.
The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the
Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 65).
Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.
• The Auto Accompaniment will automatically turn on when you select a
style in the Pianist style group.
• The Auto Accompaniment can also be
turned on during playback of song data
recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/
700/103.
• If you turn the Auto Accompaniment on
while playing back songs recorded
using the Auto Accompaniment, the
recorded accompaniment track will be
dropped in favor of the accompaniment
you play on the keyboard.
V Start the Auto Accompaniment. .......................................................
Begin playing to start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function, or start the style using one (or more) of the other
methods described on pages 64 and 67.
The methods used to indicate Auto Accompaniment chords are described in the following pages.
• You can also select style variations
and play fill-in patterns as described on
page 63 while playing along with the
Auto Accompaniment.
• Press the [ACMP ON] button again to
turn the Auto Accompaniment off
before you start playing.
Stopping the Auto Accompaniment
Use one of the methods described on page 67 to stop playback of the
style, including the Auto Accompaniment.
To turn Auto Accompaniment off, press the [ACMP ON] button so
that the lamp goes out.
CVP-109/107/105/700
68
70
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing
with the Auto Accompaniment
Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings
You can change the accompaniment mode (which selects the chord
indication method), the split point, and other Auto Accompaniment settings in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display page.
■ Displaying the Auto Accompaniment Settings ..................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ON].
ACMP ON
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
INTRO
MAIN A
➾
➔ The ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display appears.
■ Selecting an Accompaniment Mode ..............................................
To select an accompaniment mode, press one of the left LCD buttons.
Accompaniment Mode
• Settings: See insert below.
• Basic setting: MULTI FINGER
➔ The selected accompaniment mode is highlighted.
69
The method for indicating chords in each accompaniment mode are
described in detail below.
CVP-109/107/105/700
71
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Accompaniment Modes
● Single Finger
To control the Auto Accompaniment, press one, two, or three keys in
the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point), following the rules described below. Play the melody in the right range
along with the Auto Accompaniment.
■ Single Finger Chords
• The Clavinova displays the names of
the chords you play at the left edge of
the main display, below the measure
number.
• The same accompaniment continues
(even after you release the chord in
the left range) until you play the next
chord.
The following four chord types can be played in Single Finger mode:
C
• Major
Press the root note of the chord.
Cm
• Minor [m]
The illustration below shows the key
corresponding to each root note.
C# Eb F# Ab Bb
(Db)(D#) (Gb)(G#)(A#)
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
black key to the left of it.
C7
• Seventh [7]
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
white key to the left of it.
Cm7
C D E F G A B
• Minor Seventh [m7]
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
white and black keys to the left of it (three keys at once).
● Multi Finger
This method allows you to control the Auto Accompaniment using
either the Single Finger method (described above) or the Fingered 1
method (described below). However, when indicating minor, seventh or
minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black
key nearest the root note of the chord.
● Fingered 1
To control the Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range
of the keyboard (below and including the split point). Play the melody in
the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment.
• The automatic accompaniment will
sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g.
some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
• If the Clavinova cannot recognize a
chord you play, an asterisk “ * ” will
appear instead of the chord name in
the display.
• Drums-only accompaniment can be
produced by pressing any three consecutive keys (e.g., C, C#, D) simultaneously. This lets you create dynamic
“drum breaks” in the accompaniment.
A series of dashes “- - -” will appear
instead of a chord name in the display.
Two-note fingerings will produce a chord
based on the previously played chord.
CVP-109/107/105/700
70
72
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing
with the Auto Accompaniment
■ Chords in Fingered 1 mode
The chord types below can be played in Fingered 1 mode. For a fingering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see page 15
of the Reference Booklet.
• Major
• Sixth [6]
• Major seventh [M7]
• Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)]
• Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)]
• Added ninth [add 9]
• Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)]
• Six ninth [6 (9)]
• Flatted fifth [(b5)]
• Augmented [aug]
• Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]
• Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)]
• Minor [m]
• Minor sixth [m6]
• Minor seventh [m7]
• Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]
• Minor added ninth [m add 9]
• Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)]
• Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)]
• Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 (b5)]
• Minor major seventh [mM7]
• Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)]
• Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]
• Diminished seventh [dim7]
• Seventh [7]
• Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
• Seventh ninth [7 (9)]
• Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)]
• Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)]
• Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]
• Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)]
• Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)]
• Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)]
• Suspended fourth [sus4]
● Fingered 2
To control the Auto Accompaniment, play chords in the left range of
the keyboard as for Fingered 1. In this mode, however, the lowest note
you play in the will be used as the bass root, as shown at right.
■ Chords in Fingered 2 mode
On-bass Chords
C
C on E
C on G
The Clavinova will recognize the same chord types as listed above for
Fingered 1 mode.
● Full Keyboard
When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the Clavinova will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about
anything using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You don’t have to
worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display.
• Although Full Keyboard mode is
designed to work with many types of
music, some arrangements may not
be suitable for use with this feature.
• Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely
short chords — less than an 8th note
in length — may not be detected.
71
Keep in mind…
You can use the Dual and Split modes
together with the Auto Accompaniment.
CVP-109/107/105/700
73
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Using the Synchronized Stop Function ...................................
The SYNCHRO STOP function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
display automatically stops the Auto Accompaniment when you’re not
holding down any keys to the left of the split point.
Press the SYNCHRO STOP button to turn the function on.
This function can only be turned on if the
Auto Accompaniment is on and Full
Keyboard mode is not selected.
➔ The SYNCHRO STOP function is highlighted, and the [SYNCHRO]
lamp lights.
The Auto Accompaniment automatically starts when you play in the
left range of the keyboard, and stops when you release it.
To turn the function off, press SYNCHRO STOP again.
This is useful for beginning players who
have difficulty playing in precise time. It is
also effective for creating accompaniment “breaks” during the performance.
■ Changing the Split Point ............................................................................
You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE display to set the split point at any desired key position. The keys
to the left of (and including) the split point control the chords played by
the Auto Accompaniment in every accompaniment mode except Full
Keyboard.
SPLIT POINT function
• Settings: Any key of the keyboard
• Basic setting: F#2
F 2
Left range
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Right range
Use the SPLIT POINT ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and
[+] buttons to change the split point.
Press either the ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
• The split point cannot be set when Full
Keyboard mode is selected.
• Changing the split point here also
changes it for the Split mode (see
page 43).
➔ The selected key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.
If the Auto Accompaniment or the Split mode (page 41) is on, the
keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected split point lights.
CVP-109/107/105/700
72
74
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing
with the Auto Accompaniment
■ Getting Help With Chords .........................................................................
The CHORD ASSIST function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
display uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate
fingerings for chords.
Z Turn the Chord Assistance function on.
Press the CHORD ASSIST button.
➔ The CHORD ASSIST display appears, and the accompaniment
mode automatically changes to Fingered 1.
Chord Assistance
The Chord Assistance feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that
shows you appropriate fingerings for
chords; it is useful when you want to
quickly learn how to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired chord via the
display, and the fingerings for the Fingered 1 method are indicated by the
keyboard guide lamps.
• If the [ACMP ON] button is off, it will
turn on.
• If the split point is set below F#2, it will
automatically be reset to F#2.
• The keyboard guide lamps do not
indicate the split point when Chord
Assistance is on, since they are used
to indicate chord fingerings instead.
X Start the Auto Accompaniment.
Press [START/STOP] or use the Synchronized Start function (page
65) to start the Auto Accompaniment.
C Enter the chord root.
Use the ROOT button to select a root.
➔ The ROOT function is highlighted, and the root changes.
ROOT function
Settings: See sidebar on page 72.
If you hold the ROOT button down, the
INVERT setting may also change.
73
When the ROOT function is highlighted, you can also use the data
dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a root.
CVP-109/107/105/700
75
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
V Enter the chord type.
Use the TYPE ▼ and ▲ buttons to select a chord type.
TYPE function
Settings: See list at left.
➔ The TYPE function is highlighted, and the type changes.
When the TYPE function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial
or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a chord type.
The following chord types can be specified in the display:
Major [Maj]
Minor [m]
Seventh [7]
Minor seventh [m7]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]
Sixth [6]
Minor sixth [m6]
Major seventh [M7]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Augmented [aug]
Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]
Diminished seventh [dim7]
Flatted fifth [(b5)]
Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
B Rotate the fingering as desired.
Press INVERT to shift the fingering down the keyboard. Each time
the INVERT button is pressed, the next viable fingering for the chord
appears. The INVERT function displays the inversion number.
N Enter the chord.
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the fingering for the selected
chord, and the musical notation for the chord is displayed in the
center of the LCD display. At this point you can either play the chord
on the keyboard or press the ENTER button to hear the accompaniment play it.
M Stop the Auto Accompaniment.
When you’re done with Chord Assistance, press [START/STOP] or
[ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.
• Any chords recognized in Fingered 1
mode can be entered from the keyboard.
• The Clavinova displays the name of
the chord recognized from the keyboard at the left edge of the LCD display, under the measure number. You
can compare this chord root and type
displayed by the ROOT and TYPE
functions to make sure you’re fingering
the chord correctly. When the root of
the chord being played corresponds to
one of the black keys on the keyboard,
the root may be displayed as either
flat or sharp; for example, Bb may also
be displayed as A# (see the sidebar on
page 72 for details).
• A flashing keyboard guide lamp indicates a note which may be omitted.
< Turn Chord Assistance off.
To turn Chord Assistance off, press [EXIT] or [ACMP ON].
➔ The main display appears. If you press [ACMP ON], the Auto Accompaniment is turned off at the same time.
CVP-109/107/105/700
74
76
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing
with the Auto Accompaniment
Adjusting Individual Part Levels
The Clavinova has five accompaniment parts: Rhythm, Bass, Chord,
Pad, and Phrase.
RHYTHM
This part forms the basis of the accompaniment. The Rhythm
part usually plays one of the drum kits.
BASS
The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including
acoustic bass and synth bass.
CHORD
The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accompaniment for each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal
instruments here.
PAD
The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir.
PHRASE
The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy
brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the
accompaniment more interesting.
The volume settings for the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted
individually in the MIXER display page.
• The overall accompaniment playback
volume can be adjusted using the
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider.
• By adjusting the volume balance of the
various parts, or setting the volume of
some parts to 0, you can create variations on the basic style accompaniment.
• Some styles may not use all five accompaniment parts.
• You can also adjust the level of reverb
that is applied to the Auto Accompaniment parts. See page 50 for details.
Part volume relationships
• The volume level of each Auto Accompaniment part is relative to the [ACMP/
SONG VOLUME] setting.
• The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] setting
is relative to the [MASTER VOLUME]
setting.
Z Press the [MIXER] button. .......................................................................
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
➔ The lamp lights, and the MIXER page appears.
X Select a part. ..........................................................................................................
Press the LCD button for the part whose level you want to set.
75
➔ The selected function is highlighted.
CVP-109/107/105/700
77
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
C Set the volume level. .....................................................................................
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume level.
You can also increase the level by holding down the button you used to
select the part.
You can set the volume of the highlighted part to 0 by pressing and
quickly releasing its button. Press and release the button a second time to
restore the previous value.
To reset the highlighted part’s volume to the basic setting of 110,
simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons.
Part volume levels
• Range: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 110
V Repeat steps Xand C. ..............................................................................
Repeat the preceding steps to set the level for other parts. (You can
also select several parts and adjust their volume settings simultaneously.)
B Exit the MIXER display. ..............................................................................
To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again, or press
[EXIT].
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➔ The lamp turns off, and the main display appears.
CVP-109/107/105/700
76
78
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○
The Clavinova has many other features and functions that make
the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and
enjoyable. With these functions you can easily select panel
settings to suit a certain type of music, have the Clavinova play
harmony to your melody line, or program Auto Accompaniment
changes in advance so you can concentrate on playing the
keyboard.
MUSIC
DATABASE
STYLE
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Music Database
The Clavinova’s built-in Music Database gives you a convenient way
to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type
of music. Just select one of the more than 400 panel setups in the Music
Database; the Clavinova does the rest!
For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 13 of the
Reference Booklet.
Z Display the Music Database. ................................................................
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
➔ The lamp lights, and the MUSIC DATABASE menu appears.
Style name
Highlighted setup
Panel Setups
• CVP-109: 564
• CVP-107/700: 534
• CVP-105: 498
• When you display the Music Database,
the Clavinova automatically recalls a
panel setup that uses the current style.
(The name of this setup is highlighted
in the Music Database menu.) If you
want to use the selected setup, you
can simply skip to step 4 of this procedure.
• The Automatic Accompaniment also
turns on when you display the Music
Database. If you access the Music
Database before starting the style, the
Synchronized Start function (page 65)
is also turned on.
77
The MUSIC DATABASE menu display contains a listing of panel setups
that can be sorted either by style or alphabetically. The name of the style
that is used by the currently highlighted setup is shown at the upper right
edge of the display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
79
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Sort the list, if necessary. ........................................................................
Press the SORT button to switch the highlighted setting between
STYLE and A–Z.
To display the panel setups for a specific
style group, simply press the corresponding STYLE button. The menu is automatically sorted by style, and a panel setup
that uses the currently selected style in
the chosen group is highlighted.
➔ When STYLE is highlighted, the menu list is sorted by style, and a
panel setup that uses the currently selected style is highlighted.
➔ When A–Z is highlighted, the menu is sorted alphabetically.
C Select and recall a panel setup. ........................................................
Press one of the left or right LCD buttons to highlight the desired
panel setup in the Music Database list.
➔ The panel setup is highlighted.
The Harmony function will not be turned
on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected,
even if the selected Music Database
setup includes “Harmony On.”
You can also use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the
highlighted panel setup. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display a
different page of the Music Database.
➾ Press the SET button to recall the highlighted setup.
➔ The style, voice, and effect settings change automatically.
Once you have selected a panel setup from the Music Database, you
can change the style, voice and effect settings to suit your preferences.
You can also use the Registration function (page 108) to save the panel
setup in the Clavinova’s memory.
V Return to the main display. ....................................................................
Press [EXIT] to exit the Music Database menu display.
➔ The previous display appears. (The selected Music Database
setup is indicated below the style name in the main display.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
78
80
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Auto Accompaniment Functions
B Turn off the Music Database. ...............................................................
When you’re done using the Music Database setup, press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button again.
➔ The [MUSIC DATABASE] lamp turns off, and the panel settings
you were using before you accessed the Music Database are restored.
Accompaniment Assistance
At times you may find it difficult to control the Auto Accompaniment
while playing a complicated piece of music that requires your full attention on the keyboard. The Accompaniment Assistance function lets you
program chord and pattern changes in advance, so that the Auto Accompaniment will play itself, letting you concentrate on playing the keyboard
parts.
■ Setting Up the Accompaniment Assistance ..................
Use the following procedure to create Accompaniment Assistance
data before you begin your performance:
Z Open the ACMP ASSIST display.
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ASSIST].
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
79
➔ The [ACMP ASSIST] and [ACMP ON] lamps light, and the page 1
of the ACMP ASSIST display appears.
• If the Clavinova’s memory contains
Accompaniment Assistance data, it will
be displayed in the ACMP ASSIST
display.
• The [ACMP ON] lamp will not light
when you load Accompaniment Assistance data that includes an “accompaniment off” event (page 84). If you wish
to add chords to the loaded data, you
must first change this to an “accompaniment on” event. To do so, move the
cursor to the top of the first measure
as described in step 2 (page 82), press
[ACMP ON] to light the lamp, then
press SET. (See the sidebar on page
86 for details regarding the use of
“accompaniment off” events in Accompaniment Assistance playback.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
81
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Move the cursor to the entry point.
The display shows each measure as a horizontal line with 8th-note
divisions. The number of each measure is shown to the left of the
line. Previously entered data is indicated by a thick line segment.
Previously entered data
Measure number
• When you first open the ACMP ASSIST display, the current AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT panel settings are
entered at the top of the first measure.
This data is represented as a thick line
segment with no chord (i.e., a series of
dashes).
• You may want to change the data in
the initial segment, setting a chord and
perhaps adding an intro pattern or
fade-in (page 66), before you move the
cursor to another entry point.
Eighth note divisions
Use the CURSOR < and > buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+]
buttons to move the triangular cursor to the point at which you want
to enter a chord or style change.
C Enter a chord, if desired.
To enter a chord, play the chord with appropriate fingering in the left
range of the keyboard (lower than the split point).
➔ The name of the chord you play appears in the box below the
measure bars, as well as in the ROOT and TYPE functions.
Chord
Chord root
Chord type
• If Full Keyboard was last selected as
the accompaniment mode (page 73),
Fingered 1 is automatically selected
when you open the ACMP ASSIST
display. To indicate chords by a different method, move the cursor to the top
of the first measure, then open the
ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display
and select an accompaniment mode
(other than Full Keyboard) as described on page 71. (You can also set
a different split point in this display.)
The Clavinova will return to the ACMP
ASSIST display when you press the
[EXIT] button.
• The chord input resolution will be
automatically selected according to the
current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4,
4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord
can be entered on every 8th note or
8th-note triplet. For other time signatures, one chord can be entered for
each measure.
You can also select the ROOT and TYPE buttons, then use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to manually set the chord root and type.
V Enter a style change, if desired.
To add a fill-in pattern at any point in a measure, press the button corresponding to the desired fill-in pattern as usual (see page 63).
To change the style variation at the start of a measure without playing
a fill-in pattern, press the button twice.
To change the style at the start of a measure, simply select a new style
in the usual manner (see page 61).
CVP-109/107/105/700
80
82
• Intro patterns can only be entered at
the beginning of a song.
• Style changes, variation changes, and
ending patterns can only be entered at
the beginning of a measure.
• Fill-in patterns can be entered anywhere in the measure. (The “break fill”
pattern triggered by the left pedal
(page 190) cannot be entered using
the Accompaniment Assistance function, however.)
• A fade-out cannot be entered during a
fade-in.
• You can also use an original style
created using the Custom Style function (page 91). Only one custom style
can be included in a given set of Accompaniment Assistance data.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Auto Accompaniment Functions
➔ The names of the selected style and variation (or fill-in pattern) are
shown at the top the display.
Style name
Variation or pattern
B Set the entered data.
When you have entered chord and style control data, press the SET button.
➔ A thick line segment appears at the cursor position to indicate that
the data has been recorded, and the cursor automatically moves
to the next position.
• If you have programmed a chord
change, the chord name may also be
displayed above the segment in question.
• The chord name is indicated only at
the first beat of the measure line,
except when a style uses the 4/4 time
signature, in which case the chord
name is indicated at the first and third
beats.
• A chord change event will not be entered if the chord is the same as that
which was last entered.
N Repeat until the data is complete.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 until your Accompaniment Assistance data
is complete. You can press the [PLAY/STOP] button at any time to
play back the data and check your settings.
You can program up to 999 measures of
data using the Accompaniment Assistance function.
M Set the end mark
.
When you have completed your Accompaniment Assistance data,
press the PAGE [>] button to select page 2 of the ACMP ASSIST
display, then press the END MARK button to enter an “end mark”
that identifies the end of the data.
• An end mark is unnecessary when an
ending pattern or fade-out event has
been programmed.
• See page 85 for more information
about the end mark.
End mark
➔ The end mark symbol is displayed in the box in the middle of the
display.
➾ Press the SET button to set the end mark.
< Exit the ACMP ASSIST display.
Press [ACMP ASSIST] or [EXIT] to return to the main display.
81
➔ The [ACMP ASSIST] lamp turns off, and the main display appears.
You can always modify the Accompaniment Assistance data later by reopening
the ACMP ASSIST display and making
the desired changes.
CVP-109/107/105/700
83
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Advanced Accompaniment Assistance ...................................
Here are some other things you can do with Accompaniment Assistance data.
● Changing Part Volumes
You can program volume changes for the Auto Accompaniment parts.
Used judiciously, these can help you create professional-sounding dynamic changes in your performance. To do this, press the [MIXER] button and change the part volume settings as desired, then press [EXIT] to
return to the ACMP ASSIST display. The volume event symbol (which
looks like a speaker) should now appear in the box in the middle of the
display. Press the SET button to set the volume change as entered.
● Changing the Tempo
You can also program tempo changes in the middle of a performance.
Simply position the cursor at the point where you want the tempo to
change, then use the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons to select the new
tempo. The new tempo is displayed in the box in the middle of the
ACMP ASSIST display. Press the SET button to set the tempo change as
entered.
An initial volume event is automatically
entered at the top of the first measure,
based on the current part volume settings
when the ACMP ASSIST display is first
opened.
An initial tempo event is automatically
entered at the top of the first measure,
based on the current tempo settings
when the ACMP ASSIST display is first
opened.
● Entering a Rhythm Break
You can have Accompaniment Assistance play the rhythm part alone
(without other accompaniment) as a transitional “rhythm break.” To do
this, you must record a “no chord” event at the beginning of the break.
Press any three adjacent keys (two white keys and a black key, or vice
versa) in the left range of the keyboard when using the Fingered 1 or
Fingered 2 mode, or select TYPE and use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons to display a series of dashes (- - -) as the setting for that function.
Then press the SET button to register the break.
● Entering an Accompaniment Break
A complete break can be useful if you want to play the keyboard part
solo. To create an accompaniment break, set a “no chord” event as described above, and turn the rhythm off as described on the next page.
● Entering an “Accompaniment Off” Event
When you first open the ACMP ASSIST display to create new Accompaniment Assistance data, an “accompaniment on” event is registered at the top of the first measure. You can enter an “accompaniment
off” event by moving the cursor to the top of the first measure, pressing
the [ACMP ON] button so the lamp turns off, and pressing the SET button. See the sidebar on page 86 for details regarding the use of “accompaniment off” events in Accompaniment Assistance playback.
CVP-109/107/105/700
82
84
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Auto Accompaniment Functions
■ Other Accompaniment Assistance Functions ..................
Page 2 of the ACMP ASSIST display contains some useful functions
that help you to enter Accompaniment Assistance data more efficiently.
● ALL DELETE function
To delete all of the Accompaniment Assistance data and start from
scratch, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are you sure?” message
is displayed. Press YES to delete the data, or NO to cancel.
● DELETE function
To delete the Accompaniment Assistance data at the current cursor
location, press the DELETE button. An “Are you sure?” message is
displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel.
● END MARK function
This function is used to enter an “end mark” that identifies the end of
the Accompaniment Assistance data (see page 83). An end mark should
generally be entered to properly end the data. The cursor cannot be
moved past an end mark. You can delete an end mark with the DELETE
function, just as with other data.
● RHYTHM ON/OFF function
To turn the rhythm part on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF button followed by the SET button.
No rhythm sounds are produced following the location at which a
“rhythm off” event has been entered; the rhythm starts sounding again
from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is entered.
The status of the rhythm part is indicated by the drum symbol in the
box in the middle of the display.
• An end mark is unnecessary when an
ending pattern or fade-out event has
been programmed.
• If the Accompaniment Assistance data
is not ended by an end mark, an ending pattern, or a fade-out event, playback will end one measure after the
last entered data.
An initial “rhythm on” event is automatically entered at the top of the first measure.
This mark indicates
that the rhythm part is
playing.
■ Playing with Accompaniment Assistance .............................
Use the following procedure to play back your Accompaniment Assistance data:
Z Turn on Accompaniment Assistance.
Press the [ACMP ASSIST] button.
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
HARMONY
83
➔ The [ACMP ASSIST] lamp lights.
CVP-109/107/105/700
85
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Turn on the Auto Accompaniment.
Press the [ACMP ON] button.
➔ The [ACMP ON] lamp lights, and the current accompaniment
mode is indicated at the left edge of the main display.
The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the
Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 65).
Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.
C Start playing.
Press the [START/STOP] button, or start playing the keyboard.
➔ The Auto Accompaniment starts playing automatically, including
any section changes and chord changes indicated by the previously recorded Accompaniment Assistance data.
Play the keyboard part in the right-hand range of the keyboard, along
with the Auto Accompaniment. (The left-hand range can be used to
indicate chords, as described below in “Playing the Chords Yourself.”)
You can play back song data and Accompaniment Assistance data at the
same time. However, you will not be able
to use the [REW] or [FF] buttons, or any
of the Repeat (page 122) and Guide
Control (page 125) functions that are
normally available during song playback.
Moreover, the style changes and time
signature information in the Accompaniment Assistance data will take priority
over those in the song; any rhythm, bass,
and chord parts recorded in the song will
therefore not play back. The playback
tempo will be determined by tempo data
in the song, however.
■ Other Ways to Use Accompaniment Assistance ............
● Playing the Chords Yourself
Since the Clavinova will respond to the chords you indicate in the left
range of the keyboard when the [ACMP ON] lamp is lit, you can manually change chords even if the Accompaniment Assistance data already
includes chord changes. The Auto Accompaniment will always play the
most recently detected chord, regardless of whether that chord was indicated by the Accompaniment Assistance data or the keyboard.
If you want to play all the chord changes (while the Accompaniment
Assistance function controls the style changes for you), simply don’t
include any chord changes in the Accompaniment Assistance data.
If you have already included chords in
your Accompaniment Assistance data,
but later decide that you want to play the
chords yourself, you don’t have to go to
the trouble of erasing them. You can
achieve the same result by adding an
“accompaniment off” event at the top of
the first measure (see page 84), then
starting the Auto Accompaniment as
described in “Playing with Accompaniment Assistance,” above.
● Using the Entire Keyboard
To play a keyboard part using the entire range of the keyboard, just omit
step 2 of the procedure above. (You will also have to press [SYNCHRO]
before you start playing if you want to use the Synchronized Start function.) You won’t be able to indicate chords manually, but the Auto Accompaniment will still play according to the Accompaniment Assistance data.
● Playing the Style Without Auto Accompaniment
By combining the two techniques described above, you can have the
Accompaniment Assistance control only the style changes played by the
rhythm section without using the other accompaniment parts, to provide an
automatic percussion-only accompaniment. Just don’t include any chord
changes in the Accompaniment Assistance data, and leave the [ACMP
ON] button off when you start playing. You will be able to play along to a
simple percussion accompaniment, using the entire range of the keyboard.
As was mentioned above, if you have
already programmed chords in your
Accompaniment Assistance data, you
can achieve the same result by adding
an “accompaniment off” event at the top
of the first measure (see page 84).
■ Saving and Loading Your Data ...........................................................
Since the Clavinova’s memory can only hold one set (up to 999 measures)
of Accompaniment Assistance data at a time, you may want to save your data
on a disk so that you can load it again after programming other sets.
You can save and load Accompaniment Assistance data using the functions in the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display (see page 192).
CVP-109/107/105/700
84
86
You can also record the Accompaniment
Assistance data to a floppy disk using the
Song Record function.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Auto Accompaniment Functions
Harmony
This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you
play using the main voice in the right range of the keyboard. The harmony notes are produced automatically to match chords played with
Auto Accompaniment.
■ Adding Harmony .................................................................................................
Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing,
you can add “spice” and professional polish to your performance by applying harmony to selected phrases as you play.
Z Turn the Harmony function on.
Press the [HARMONY] button.
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
• The Harmony feature cannot be turned
on when Full Keyboard is selected as
the accompaniment mode (page 71).
• The Harmony feature can be used
while playing back the intro or ending,
or while the Auto Accompaniment is
off, if one of the following harmony
types (page 88) is selected: Octave,
1+5, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill.
HARMONY
➔ The lamp lights.
X Play the keyboard.
Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment.
• With some Harmony types the voice
used for the Harmony will be different
from the currently selected main voice.
• When chords are played in the righthand section of the keyboard, the
harmony will be applied to the last note
played.
C Turn the Harmony function off.
Press the [HARMONY] button again.
➔ The lamp turns off.
■ Displaying the Harmony Settings ....................................................
You can change the harmony type, the volume of the harmony voice,
and other harmony settings in the HARMONY display page.
To display the HARMONY page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then
[HARMONY].
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
Using the Pedals
• If you set the LEFT PEDAL function to
HARMONY (page 190), the Clavinova
will play harmony only while the left
pedal is pressed.
• If you use the left pedal to control the
harmony, that pedal will have no effect
when the Harmony function is off (i.e.,
when the [HARMONY] lamp is not lit).
HARMONY
85
➔ The HARMONY display appears.
CVP-109/107/105/700
87
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Selecting a Harmony Type ........................................................................
You can change the type of harmony that is played using the HARMONY TYPE function in the HARMONY display.
HARMONY TYPE function
• Settings: See table on this page.
• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Z Select the HARMONY TYPE function.
If necessary, press one of the LCD buttons under the HARMONY
TYPE function.
➔ The HARMONY TYPE function is highlighted.
X Select a harmony type.
Use the left and right LCD buttons to select a harmony type. If necessary, use the PAGE [<] or [>] buttons to display additional harmony
types.
➔ The selected harmony type is highlighted.
You can also change the harmony type with the HARMONY TYPE ▲
and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons. To restore the
basic setting for the currently selected main voice, press the HARMONY TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously.
Since the basic setting of the HARMONY TYPE function depends on
the currently selected main voice, a different harmony type may be
selected automatically if you change the main voice selection.
Harmony Types
Type
CVP-109/107/105/700
Speed
Duet
❍
–
Trio
❍
–
Block
❍
–
4 Part
❍
–
Country
❍
–
Octave
❍
–
1+5
❍
–
Echo
–
❍
Tremolo
–
❍
Trill
–
❍
Strumming
–
–
Add Jazz Gtr
–
–
Add Brass
–
–
Add Strings
–
–
In The Forest
–
–
• On the CVP-109/107/700, effects
applied to the main voice will also be
applied to the harmony part when
certain harmony types (indicated by a
“❍” in the Effect column of the table at
left) are selected.
• Some harmony types (indicated by a
“❍” in the Speed column of the table at
left) have a speed setting that can be
adjusted. See the next topic for details.
86
88
Effect
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Auto Accompaniment Functions
■ Changing the Harmony Speed .............................................................
You can change the speed of the harmony notes played by the Echo,
Tremolo, and Trill harmony types using the SPEED function in the
HARMONY display.
SPEED function
• Settings: 4, 6, 8, 12 (Echo)
8, 12, 16, 32 (Tremolo)
12, 16, 24, 32 (Trill)
• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Z Select the SPEED function.
Press the LCD button under the SPEED function.
➔ The SPEED function is highlighted.
X Change the SPEED setting.
Use the SPEED button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to
change the value of the SPEED function.
■ Changing the Harmony Volume .........................................................
You can change the volume of the harmony notes using the VOLUME function in the HARMONY display.
VOLUME function
• Settings: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Z Select the VOLUME function.
Press the one of the LCD buttons under the VOLUME function.
➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.
X Change the VOLUME setting.
87
Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+]
buttons to change the value of the VOLUME function.
To restore the VOLUME function to its basic setting for the currently
selected main voice, press the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–]
and [+] buttons simultaneously.
CVP-109/107/105/700
89
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
One Touch Setting
The Clavinova’s convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy
for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re
playing. Each style has four preprogrammed panel setups that you can
select by pressing a single button.
For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 13 of the
Reference Booklet.
The One Touch Setting function cannot
be used with styles in the [DISK/CUSTOM] group.
Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................
Select the desired style in the normal way (see page 61).
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
DISK
CUSTOM
X Make sure the ONE TOUCH SETTING function is on.
If necessary, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
➔ The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button lamp lights.
C Select a panel setup. .....................................................................................
Press one of the four numbered buttons under REGISTRATION/ONE
TOUCH SETTING.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
• When you select a panel setup, the
Auto Accompaniment turns on automatically. If you select a panel setup
before starting the style, the Synchronized Start function (page 65) will also
turn on.
• The Harmony function will not be
turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is
selected, even if the selected One
Touch Setting setup includes “Harmony On.”
➔ The voice and effect settings change automatically, and the selected OTS setup is indicated in the main display, below and to the
right of the style name.
Once you have selected a panel setup using the One Touch Setting
function, you can change the voice and effect settings to suit your preferences. You can also use the Registration function (page 108) to save the
panel setup in the Clavinova’s memory.
CVP-109/107/105/700
88
90
Creating Your Own Styles
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○
The Clavinova lets you create custom accompaniment styles
that you can recall and play back at any time, just like the presets.
Up to 12 custom styles can be maintained in the Clavinova’s
memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk
for later reloading and use.
Recording a Custom Style
Use the following procedure to record your own custom styles.
Z Select the DISK/CUSTOM style group. ......................................
Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
DISK
• One temporary style (named
TEMP.STYLE) is automatically loaded
into the DISK/CUSTOM style memory
when the power is turned on.
• If you have loaded other style data
(see page 106), you can select any of
the styles from the DISK/CUSTOM
STYLE menu to serve as the basis for
your new custom style.
CUSTOM
➔ The lamp lights, and the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display appears.
X Select the CUSTOM STYLE function. ............................................
89
Press the CUSTOM STYLE button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
91
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
➔ The “Select a source style” message is displayed for a few
seconds, then replaced by page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.
The style that was selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display
begins playing.
C Select a source style. ...................................................................................
Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset
style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 61).
You can also use the style already selected in the DISK/CUSTOM
STYLE display as the basis for your new style, or select a different
DISK/CUSTOM style just as you would a preset style.
V Select the section you want to record. .....................................
In page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, press the SECTION button as many times as necessary to display the section you want to record:
MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, MAIN D, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING.
Current recording section and part
• In the CUSTOM STYLE display, the
variations and patterns that make up a
style are referred to as “sections.”
• A custom style includes only one intro
section, one fill-in section, and one
ending section.
• The custom style’s intro, fill-in, and
ending sections are based on the
corresponding patterns for the style
variation (MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, or
MAIN D) that was selected when the
CUSTOM STYLE button was pressed
(page 91).
➔ The SECTION function is highlighted, and each section is displayed
in turn. The Clavinova plays the currently displayed section repeatedly.
CVP-109/107/105/700
90
92
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
Your Own Styles
B Change the beat and section length. ..........................................
If you want to create a style with a different time signature than the
selected style, or change the number of measures in the selected section,
press the PAGE [>] button.
➔ Page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display appears.
Beat of selected style
Current measure
number of selected
section
Total measure number
of selected section
● Changing the beat:
Press the BEAT button to select a different time signature.
➔ The “Clear style?” message is displayed.
BEAT function
• Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5
• Basic setting: Depends on style.
Clear style?
Since the patterns of the selected
style will not match the new beat,
you will have to completely clear
the style and start recording from
scratch if you change the time
signature.
91
➾ Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style
has been cleared, you can use the BEAT button, the data dial, or
the [–] and [+] buttons to select a new time signature.
CVP-109/107/105/700
93
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
● Changing the section length:
Press the MEASURE button to change the number of measures in the
current section.
MEASURE function
• Settings: 1 — 8
• Basic setting: Depends on style.
➔ The “Clear section?” message is displayed.
Clear section?
• You will have to clear all parts of the
currently selected section and start
recording from scratch if you change
the number of measures.
• The “Clear section?” message will not
be displayed if you have already
cleared the section by changing the
beat, as described above.
The length of the FILL IN section can
only be set to one measure.
➾ Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style
has been cleared, you can use the MEASURE button, the data
dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to set the section length.
● When you’re done here:
Once the BEAT and/or MEASURE parameters have been set as required, press the PAGE [<] button to return to page 1 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display.
N Select the part you want to record. ...............................................
Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the part you want to record.
R1
R2
Bs
C1
C2
Pd
P1
P2
The R1 part is initially selected and set to
record.
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Recording part
Playback part
OFF
Part containing no data
• Only one part can be set to record.
• All other parts will be set to PLAY (the
part number is surrounded by a box) or
OFF (only the part number is displayed).
Any part you select can be set to record by using the rightmost LCD
button to select RECORD after selecting the part.
CVP-109/107/105/700
92
94
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
➔ The part number is highlighted. If you have selected a part other than
R1 or R2, the “Clear part?” message will be displayed.
Your Own Styles
Clear part?
• If the source style is a preset style or a
style loaded from an optional Style File
disk, parts other than R1 and R2 must
be cleared before they can be recorded.
• The “Clear part?” message will not be
displayed if the selected part does not
contain any data.
➾ Press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort.
M Select the voice for the part. .........................................................
At this point you can also select the voice you want to record the
part with. Select the voice as you would the main keyboard voice
(see page 31).
Part
Voices that can be used
R1
Any drum or SFX kit in PERCUSSION group
R2
Any except Organ Flute (CVP-109/107/700)
Others
Any except a drum kit, SFX kit, or Organ Flute (CVP-109/107/700)
The preset voice for the part being recorded is initially selected.
< Record the selected part. ..................................................................
93
You can now record new notes in the selected part by playing the
keyboard at the appropriate timing. Record non-percussion parts in C
major seventh (CM7), since the custom style is recorded as a C major seventh pattern.
If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the
CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to
record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared, the metronome will
sound to provide a timing guide. (The metronome sound is not recorded, and will stop as soon as the custom style is stored.)
• Playback of the custom style can be
started and stopped by pressing the
[START/STOP] button. (Data cannot
be recorded while playback is
stopped.)
• All notes are automatically stopped at
the end of the style (i.e., at the point
between repeats when recording). It is
therefore not advisable to record over
this point.
CVP-109/107/105/700
95
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
When recording a drum kit voice in part R1 or R2, you can clear a
single drum instrument from the part by pressing the key corresponding
to the instrument to be cleared while holding down the C1 key on the
keyboard. (The C1 key is labeled “CANCEL.”) The metronome timing
guide can also be cleared in this way.
Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this
button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press
the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear all parts in
the selected section.
> Quantize the recorded part, if necessary. ..............................
You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by using the PART
QUANTIZE functions in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to
align all the notes to a specified beat. Press the PAGE [>] button to display the function, then press the middle LCD button to select the
quantize size:
3
32nd notes
16th note triplets
3
16th notes
8th note triplets
8th notes
3
quarter-note triplets
quarter notes
Once the required quantize size has been selected, press the START
LCD button to quantize the current part. The part will begin to play using
the new timing, and the START button will change to UNDO, allowing
you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if
the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once
another button has been pressed.
CVP-109/107/105/700
94
96
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
Your Own Styles
? Repeat until the custom style is complete. ..........................
Repeat steps 4 through 9 to record other parts for the currently selected section.
During custom style recording, no MIXER
display is available.
Repeat steps 4 through 10 to record other sections, until all sections
have been recorded.
[ Name the custom style. .............................................................................
When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select
page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the STYLE NAME
LCD button to display the NAME page.
95
Use the CHAR > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the
character you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in
length). Use the data dial and/or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the
character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then
press the CHAR SET LCD button to enter the character at the current
cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The
BACK SPACE LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete
the preceding character.
When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the
current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.
CVP-109/107/105/700
97
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Store the custom style. ..............................................................................
Press the STORE LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE
display to store the current custom style in the Clavinova’s memory.
The current tempo setting at the time the
custom style is stored becomes the
preset tempo for that style.
➔ The Clavinova displays a message asking you to confirm your
decision to store the style.
➾ Use the MEMORY NO. ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–]
and [+] buttons to select the memory number (1 through 12)
where you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store
or CANCEL to abort.
If the selected memory number already
contains a style, the style name will
appear next to the memory number. The
existing style will be overwritten when a
new style is stored.
● Be Sure to Save Your Data!
Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned
off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off
(see page 101).
Exit when done. ..................................................................................................
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the CUSTOM STYLE display and
return to the main display.
EXIT
CVP-109/107/105/700
96
98
DIRECT ACCESS
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
Your Own Styles
Other Custom Style Functions
In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom
style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages
include several other functions that you may find useful when creating
custom styles.
■ RECALL SECTION function .....................................................................
This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the
currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply
press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in page 2 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display. If the Clavinova cannot recall the preceding operation
(i.e., after time signature has been changed), the “Can’t recall!” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to the previous
display.
■ STYLE CLEAR function .................................................................................
97
Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display to completely clear the current custom style. The “Are
you sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to clear the style, or
NO to cancel the change.
CVP-109/107/105/700
99
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Volume and Effects .........................................................................................
Page 4 of the CUSTOM STYLE display includes several functions
that let you set the volume, reverb, chorus type and depth, effect (CVP109/107/700), and pan for each part of each custom style section.
Z Select the section and part.
Use the SECTION function to select a section (or select ALL for all
sections), and the PART function to select a part (or select ALL for all
parts).
CVP-109/107/700
X Select the parameter you want to set.
The third LCD button selects the parameter to be set for the current
section and part. Choose from VOLUME, REVERB, CHORUS, EFFECT (CVP-109/107/700) or PAN.
CVP-109/107/700
CVP-105
C Select the chorus type.
If you selected CHORUS in step 2, the TYPE function is displayed
above the fourth LCD button. Use this function to select the chorus
type you want to apply to the current section and part.
Chorus Type List
• CHORUS 1
• CHORUS 2
• CHORUS 3
• CELESTE 1
• CELESTE 2
• CELESTE 3
• FLANGER 1
• FLANGER 2
• OFF
CVP-109/107/700
CVP-109/107/105/700
98
100
The word “OTHERS” may appear as the
chorus type if the preset style uses a
chorus type other than those in the list.
The OTHERS setting cannot be re-selected once you select a different chorus
type.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
Your Own Styles
V Set the value or depth of the selected parameter.
The VALUE (or DEPTH) function displayed above the rightmost
LCD button sets the amount or depth for the parameter selected in
step 2.
When VOLUME is selected, the SECTION setting is fixed at ALL
and the VALUE range is from –50 to +50 (this value is relative to
the preset volume of the source style). When the REVERB, CHORUS,
or EFFECT (CVP-109/107/700) parameter is selected, the DEPTH
can be set in a range from 0 to 127. When PAN is selected, the
VALUE function can be set in a range from L10 (full left) to C
(center) to R10 (full right).
• The reverb and effect types used for
the custom style are determined by the
style that was selected as the basis for
custom style creation.
• Normally the VALUE and chorus TYPE
settings from the preset style are initially selected. If the PART function is
set to ALL, the preset values for part
R1 are displayed. If the SECTION
function is set to ALL, the preset values for MAIN A are displayed.
B Repeat as necessary.
Repeat the preceding steps to set other parameters for each part and
section in the custom style.
■ Saving Styles to Disk ...................................................................................
Page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display lets you save custom styles
on a disk. You can save custom styles individually, or in a complete set
of up to 12 styles.
After inserting a properly formatted disk (page 131) in the Clavinova’s
disk drive, use the MEMORY NO. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the custom
style you want to save to disk, or select ALL to save a complete set of up
to 12 custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to
start saving the data to disk. At this point the SAVE display appears.
99
Enter a name for the style file. The procedure for entering the
filename is the same as that used to enter a name for a custom style (page
112). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the
same name already exists, the “Same name! Overwrite?” message will be displayed. Press OK to overwrite the existing file, or CANCEL to abort the save operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
101
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Custom styles must be stored in the Clavinova’s memory before they
can be saved to a disk. If a custom style has not been stored and you attempt to save it to disk, the “Store in memory before saving
to disk” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return
to page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. Store the custom style (see
step 12 on page 98), then try saving again.
Style files can be loaded from disk using
the ALL LOAD and SINGLE LOAD functions, as described in the “Loading Style
Files” section (page 105).
■ Deleting Style Files .........................................................................................
Style files can also be deleted from a disk using the DELETE function on page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.
After inserting a disk that contains style files in the Clavinova disk
drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use the FILE ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select the style file you want to delete from the disk. The “Are you
sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the style file, or
NO to cancel.
■ Exiting Custom Style Mode ...................................................................
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode and return to
the main display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
100
102
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating
Your Own Styles
Playing Back Your Custom Styles
Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for playback by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE
▲ and ▼ LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select
the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played
in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 61).
Since only one intro pattern, one fill-in
pattern, and one ending pattern can be
recorded for each custom style, no intro,
fill-in, or ending variations are produced
during playback.
Messages in Custom Style Mode
The following messages may appear when creating and storing a style
in Custom Style mode.
■ Memory Full During Recording .........................................................
This message will be displayed if the memory becomes full during
recording or editing.
Press OK to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display, then simplify the
style by clearing a part, etc.
■ Insufficient Memory To Store ..............................................................
This message will be displayed if there is not enough memory to perform a store operation.
101
In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you don’t need,
or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display and simplify the current style (by
clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to delete one or more styles.
CVP-109/107/105/700
103
Creating Your Own Styles
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
If you select the DELETE function, the “Select style to delete”
message will be displayed:
Use the MEMORY NO. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the style you
want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to cancel
the operation.
If the Clavinova displays the “Can’t delete this style!” message when you try to delete a style, it is because you have tried to delete
the style that your custom style was based on. If this happens, press OK
to return to the “Select style to delete” display, then select a different style to delete.
The amount of memory being used by
each style is displayed next to the style
name (in approximate kilobytes). You can
refer to this amount to judge how much
memory (out of the total 300 KB) will
become available when a particular style
is deleted.
■ Exit Before Store ...............................................................................................
If you press [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode before
storing the style, the Clavinova will display a message like the one
shown below:
Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and exit,
press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to
the Custom Style mode.
■ Style Change Before Store .....................................................................
If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the style
you’ve just edited, the following display will appear:
If you want to select a different source
style without storing the current style, exit
the Custom Style mode without storing
the style (see “Exit Before Store” above),
then re-enter the Custom Style mode.
Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and select a
new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.
CVP-109/107/105/700
102
104
Using Style Files
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
You can load and play style files created in the Style File Format
either from optional Yamaha “Style File” disks, or from disks
containing custom style files you’ve created yourself.
STYLE
DISK
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
NEXT NOTE
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
CUSTOM
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
About the Yamaha Style File Format
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original auto-accompaniment format, which has evolved through years of development and refinement.
The Style File Format features a unique conversion system that allows
you to play exceptionally high-quality accompaniments with a variety of
chord types. In addition to the internal styles, the Style File Format lets
you use other sophisticated styles from optional Style File disks, as well
as styles that were created and saved to disk in the Custom Style mode.
Style files created for Clavinova models
prior to the CVP-109/107/105/700 may
have slightly different formats. If you try
loading such files, the data may not play
back as expected. (This also applies to
the use of CVP-109/107/105/700 style
data by earlier-model Clavinovas.)
Loading Styles from a Disk
Z Insert a disk. ...........................................................................................................
Insert a disk containing style files into the disk drive. The [DISK IN
USE] lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the
disk. When a Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display
(see step 2 below) will appear automatically.
If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is
not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button to open the DISK/
CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the LOAD SINGLE button.
If a disk containing both song data and
style files is inserted, the SONG PLAY
display will automatically appear. If this
happens, press the [SONG] button or the
[EXIT] button to return to the main display, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM]
button.
103
DISK IN USE
CVP-109/107/105/700
105
Using Style Files
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
To load a set of 12 style files that was created by selecting ALL as the
memory number when the files were saved in Custom Style mode (see
page 101), press the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD
SINGLE button.
X Select a style file. ..............................................................................................
Select the desired style using the left and right LCD buttons, the
STYLE ▲ and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.
You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD
button. (The LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD display.) To stop listening, press the LISTEN LCD button again, or press
the [START/STOP] button.
• If a tempo is set prior to loading the
style, that tempo becomes the default
for the loaded style.
• Some styles are too large to preview
with the LISTEN function. In this case
the “Too much data for LISTEN function! Please load data.” message will
be displayed. If this happens, load the
style directly as in step 4.
• The Auto Accompaniment is automatically turned on when the LOAD SINGLE button is pressed, and the style is
played back automatically with the
Auto Accompaniment in C Major when
the LISTEN LCD button is pressed.
You can change the chord or try playing on the keyboard while previewing a
style.
C Select a memory number and load the style. ....................
Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to
which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 12), then press
the LOAD LCD button to load the style file.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select and load other style files.
CVP-109/107/105/700
104
106
• If the selected memory number already
contains a style, the name of that style
will appear above the MEMORY and
LOAD functions in the display. The
existing style will be overwritten when
a new style is loaded. (One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM]
memory whenever the power is turned
on.)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Using
It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is
selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.
If there is not enough memory to load the specified style file, the
“Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded style?” message will be displayed. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style
you don’t need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY NO. ▼
and ▲ buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then
press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.
Style Files
• The ALL LOAD display is as follows:
When ALL LOAD is executed, all data
in the 12 memories will be replaced by
new data.
• The amount of memory being used by
each style is displayed next to the style
name (in approximate kilobytes). You
can refer to this amount to judge how
much memory (out of the total 300 KB)
will become available when a particular
style is deleted.
V Eject the disk when you’re done. ....................................................
When you’ve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive
EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display.
You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
CAUTION
The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light while
the style is being loaded. NEVER
attempt to remove a disk while the
[DISK IN USE] lamp is lit.
The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT], and STYLE
buttons will not function while the style
data is being loaded (i.e., while the [DISK
IN USE] lamp is lit).
Playing Loaded Style Files
Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the
[DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the right and left LCD buttons, the
STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to
select the style you want to play. The selected style can then be played in
exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 61).
Loaded disk styles will be retained in
memory only until the power is turned off.
STYLE
8BEAT
16BEAT
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
COUNTRY
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
DISK
105
CUSTOM
CVP-109/107/105/700
107
6: Registrations
CHAPTER
Using Registrations
(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Registration feature lets you store complete panel setups
that you can recall whenever needed. A total of 20 setups (5
banks containing 4 memories each) can be registered in the
Clavinova’s memory.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
MAX
MIN
MIN
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
SOUND
REPEAT
1
SIGNAL
MAX
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
2
3
4
BANK
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
BANK
REGISTRATION
Storing a Panel Setup
Use the following procedure to store a panel setup as a registration in
the Clavinova’s memory.
Z Set up the controls as needed. ...........................................................
For a list of the settings that are memorized by the Registration function, refer to page 13 of the Reference Booklet.
X Select a registration bank. .......................................................................
Use the BANK [+] and [–] buttons to select the desired bank.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
Registration bank
• Range: A — E
• Basic setting: A
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
➔ The selected bank is displayed below and to the right of the style
name in the main display.
Registration bank
CVP-109/107/105/700
106
108
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Using
Registrations
C Register the panel setup. ..........................................................................
While holding down the [REGISTRATION] button, press one of the
buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH
SETTING corresponding to the registration memory where you want to
save the setup.
Registration Memory
• Range: 1 — 4 (each bank)
• Basic setting: None
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
➔ The number and name of the selected registration memory appear
below and to the right of the style name in the main display. The
panel settings that were previously stored in the selected registration are cleared and replaced by the new settings.
Registration number
and name
• Pre-programmed settings are initially
stored in all registration memories
when the Clavinova’s power is first
turned on.
• By default, the registration settings are
preserved even when the Clavinova’s
power is turned off (see page 206).
You can also save individual registrations (or complete sets of 20 registrations) to floppy disk for future recall
(see page 192).
Recalling the Registered Panel Settings
Z Press the [REGISTRATION] button. .............................................
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
➔ The [REGISTRATION] lamp lights.
X Select a bank. .......................................................................................................
Use the BANK [+] and [–] buttons to select the bank that contains the
desired registration.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
➔ The selected bank is displayed below and to the right of the style
name in the main display.
C Select a registration. .....................................................................................
107
Press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration
memory you want to recall.
CVP-109/107/105/700
109
Using Registrations
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION
➔ The number and name of the recalled registration appear below
and to the right of the style name in the main display.
A pencil icon will appear to the right of the registration name in the
display as soon as any change is made to the panel buttons or settings.
The pencil icon is displayed to remind you that the current panel settings
are different from those stored by the Registration function.
Edit symbol
• Registered panel settings are not
recalled when a bank is selected. The
settings are recalled only when one of
the numbered buttons ([1] through [4])
is pressed.
• When the LEFT PEDAL function is set
to REGISTRATION (see page 190),
the left pedal can be used to select the
registration memories in sequential
order (A1 through E4), letting you
recall a different registration each time
the pedal is pressed. However, other
left pedal settings saved by the Registration function cannot be recalled in
this case.
Protecting Panel Settings
You can use the Registration Freeze function to prevent certain panel
settings from being changed when a Registration is recalled. This allows
you to recall various registrations while using the Auto Accompaniment
without suddenly changing the style or volume settings.
Z Open the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display. .....................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REGISTRATION].
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
2
3
4
➾
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
• You can also display this page by
pressing the PAGE [<] button when
the REGISTRATION [NAME] display is
showing.
• For a list of the settings in each freeze
category, see page 13 in the Reference Booklet.
➔ The REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display appears.
CVP-109/107/700
Freeze categories
Categories to be frozen are marked by an asterisk (*) in the menu
listing. Also, the ON setting (in the ON/OFF function over the middle
LCD button) is highlighted when a category to be frozen is selected.
CVP-109/107/105/700
108
110
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using
Registrations
X Indicate the categories to be frozen. ............................................
Use the left and right LCD buttons (just the left LCD buttons on the
CVP-105) to select a category, then press the ON/OFF button to mark or
unmark the selected category.
You can also select a category using the CATEGORY ▲ and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.
CVP-109/107/700
Freeze Categories
• Settings: ON, OFF
• Basic setting: ON (ACMP SETTING)
OFF (others)
• Backup of last settings: ON
The VOCAL HARMONY category is only
available on the CVP-109/107/700.
Repeat this step to mark or unmark other categories, as needed.
C Turn the Freeze function on or off. ................................................
Press the FREEZE LCD button to freeze or unfreeze the categories
you marked in step 2.
➔ The FREEZE function is highlighted when the marked categories
are frozen. When the Freeze function is off, the settings in all categories are not protected.
V Exit the display. ...................................................................................................
To exit the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display and return to the
main display, press [EXIT].
FREEZE
• Settings: ON (highlighted),
OFF (unhighlighted)
• Basic setting: OFF
• Backup of last setting: ON
Naming the Registration
A temporary name is given to each registration when you register the
panel settings; however, you can change this name freely with this function.
Z Open the REGISTRATION [NAME] display. ...........................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by one of the numbered buttons
([1] through [4]) under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
109
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
You can also display this page by pressing the PAGE [>] button when the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display is showing.
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
CVP-109/107/105/700
111
Using Registrations
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
➔ The REGISTRATION [NAME] page is displayed. The currently
selected bank is highlighted, as is the name of the registration
corresponding to the numbered button you pressed in step 1.
X Select a registration to name. ..............................................................
Use the left and right LCD buttons to select the bank and name of the
registration whose name you wish to change.
You can also select a registration bank and number using the BANK
▲ and ▼ or REGIST ▲ and ▼ buttons, respectively.
C Edit the registration name. ......................................................................
Press the NAME button to open the NAME display.
Use the CHAR > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the
character you want to change (registration names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [–] and [+] buttons to select
the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display,
then press the CHAR SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until the registration name is
complete. The BACK SPACE LCD button can be used to back up one
space and delete the preceding character.
When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the
selected registration, or CANCEL to abort.
➔ The display returns to the main display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
110
112
7: Song Control
CHAPTER
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova can play back songs recorded using the Song
Record function (page 130), as well as song data included on
various commercially available software disks. You can also play
along on the keyboard as the songs play back. Moreover, when
song data software includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the
display during playback.
• See “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” (page 9)
for information on using floppy disks.
• The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs recorded on a single disk.
Any songs exceeding this number will not be available for playback.
• Playback data is normally not output via MIDI. However, you can set
the Clavinova to output song data using the Song Transmission function in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display (page 204).
• In addition to songs you’ve recorded yourself, the CVP-109/107/105/
700 can play back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC software, XG software, and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software.
See “Playing Other Types of Music Data” on page 124.
• Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is compatible with the Lyric Display function of the Clavinova.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
VOCAL
HARMONY
CUSTOM
MUSIC
DATABASE
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
DISK IN USE
PIANO
E. PIANO
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
GUITAR
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
XG
PAUSE
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
SONG CONTROL
STRINGS/
CHOIR
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
MIN
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Song Playback
Z Enter the Song Play mode. .................................................................
Gently insert the included “Music Software Collection” disk or a
disk containing songs you’ve recorded yourself into the disk drive.
Make sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in
the illustration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is automatically called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive.
The Song Play mode is not automatically
engaged if the disk is inserted when one of
the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page
192) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page
92) is showing.
DISK IN USE
Sliding shutter
111
Label
CVP-109/107/105/700
113
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
➔ The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG PLAY
[MAIN] display (display page 1) appears and the [SONG] lamp
lights.
If a song disk has been inserted but the Song Play mode is not engaged, press the [SONG] button.
➔ The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to
select the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not
shown.
X Select a song number. ................................................................................
Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG button, data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
➔ The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon
which indicates the type of the file are displayed.
Song numbers 1 through 99 are displayed, including song numbers that
contain no song data. However, no song
names are displayed for song numbers
that contain no data.
Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order.
Select “RANDOM” if you want all songs on the disk to be played at
random. For either selection “ALL” or “RANDOM” the songs will be
repeated until playback is stopped.
Current voice for the keyboard
Tempo
Selected song
number/name
File icon
● File Icons
There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file.
Icons
File Type
XG/SMF format file
DOC/ESEQ format file
Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file
Song data recorded with the CVP-109/107/105/700
CVP-109/107/105/700
• Icons are not shown for GM song
files or song data files recorded with
CVP models other than the CVP-109/
107/105/700/103, the CVP-98/96/
600, or the CVP-94/92.
112
114
• Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 229) for information on file
formats.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY
[LIST] display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names
in the disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the left/right
LCD buttons, data dial, or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also select the
song by pressing the SONG ▲ and ▼ buttons. Up to ten song titles are
shown in the display at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next ten
titles will appear when you scroll past the last title shown in the display.
You can press the SONG ▲ button when song 1 is displayed to select
the ALL setting, so the Clavinova will play back all songs on the disk in
order. Pressing the SONG ▲ button a second time selects the RANDOM
setting, which causes the Clavinova to play back all the songs in random
order.
Playback
When nothing appears in the song
name location…
This indicates that there is no song data
for this song number.
Repeat Playback from a Specific Song
If you first select ALL, and then select a
song in the SONG PLAY [LIST] display
(display page 3) by using the left/right
LCD buttons, all songs will be repeatedly
played back starting from the selected
song.
Repeat Playback of a Single Song
If you select a song in the SONG PLAY
[MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY
[LIST] display (display page 3), and then
select 1 SONG in the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4), only the
selected song will be played back repeatedly until stopped.
C Start and stop playback. ............................................................................
Start playback of the selected song by pressing the [PLAY/STOP]
button.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
➔ Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM has
been selected, the selected song will play through to the end, then
playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and
tempo will be shown in the display during playback.
You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback.
➔ Song playback stops.
Voice Selection During Playback
The voice you play from the keyboard
can be changed during song playback by
selecting a voice in the normal way (page
31). The voices of the 1/RIGHT and 2/
LEFT parts being played back can be
changed in the SONG PLAY [L&R
VOICE] display (page 118).
Please note that the song may not start
immediately after you press [PLAY/
STOP].
Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp
The keyboard guide lamps corresponding
to the notes being played by the 1/RIGHT
and 2/LEFT parts will light in real time.
These guide lamps can be turned off in
the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display
(display page 5). (See page 128.)
Turning Off the Lyric Display
Lyrics are shown in the display when
playing back software which contains
lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics
from appearing, you can disable this
function in page 5 of the SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] display.
You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
113
To exit the Song Play mode, press [SONG] or [EXIT]. The lamp
turns off and the previous display appears.
Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback
When you set the Left Pedal Function to
START/STOP in the FUNCTION
[PEDAL] display (display page 3), the left
pedal will function like the [START/
STOP] button. (See page 190.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
115
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
● Adjusting the Tempo
The playback tempo of the song can be changed as desired. (See page
27.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at any time
by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons.
Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the
free tempo software, “- - -” will appear in place of the tempo in the display, and the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond
to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of
the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo
based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the display when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range
differs depending on the software).
The BEAT lamps (page 64) may not
flash during playback of free-tempo
software.
With some songs, the displayed measure numbers may not match those
marked on the score.
TEMPO
RESET
V Eject the disk. .......................................................................................................
When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the
disk drive’s EJECT button to remove it.
CAUTION
Never take out the disk while the DISK
IN USE lamp is lit or while a song is
being played back.
➔ The LCD display returns to the main display.
Volume Adjustment for Each Part
The volume of each part can be adjusted
in the MIXER display.
DISK IN USE
Adjusting the Level Balance of Song
Playback and the Keyboard Voices
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control
(page 23) to adjust the volume.
When playing back a song recorded on
the CVP-109/107/105/700/103, the Auto
Accompaniment can be turned on by
pressing the [ACMP ON] button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
114
116
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Playback
Part Cancel
The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accompaniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to
turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are highlighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the
right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.
• Parts can be switched on and off during playback.
• Parts not having any data cannot be
turned on. This applies when there is
actually no data in the assigned track
(page 118), or when the track assigned
to the 2/LEFT part is set to “TRK - (OFF).”
In the case of Yamaha Disklavier
PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/ESEQ
files, the part indication does not appear
for the parts without data.
In this example, 1/RIGHT is canceled.
The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page
6 of the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 118).
■ Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On or Off
Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all
orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 16) — or all parts other than 1/RIGHT
and 2/LEFT — on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on
or off individually in the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display
page 2).
Z Select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] page.
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY
[TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2).
115
➔ Tracks which contain data are indicated above the TRACK < and
> buttons. Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box
surrounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data
are not displayed.
All track numbers appear whether, the
tracks contain data or not, when a Standard MIDI file song is selected (except
songs recorded on the CVP-109/107/
105/700/103, the CVP-98/96/600, and
the CVP-94/92).
CVP-109/107/105/700
117
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
X Select the desired track for playback (PLAY/OFF, SOLO).
Select the track by using the TRACK < and >buttons, the data dial,
or the [–] and [+] buttons.
➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
Turn playback on or off for the selected track by pressing the
rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback) or OFF.
When a track is muted, the track number is “ghosted” and the surrounding box diappears. The voice used by the currently selected
track is shown above PLAY/OFF.
Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear
only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel
the Solo function.
Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT
2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment
■ Assigning Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT .............................
Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT functions in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively
turn playback of assigned tracks on or off. TRK - - (OFF) can be assigned to 2/LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.
Select the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (display page 6) by
using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
➾ Press the 1/RIGHT button or the 2/LEFT button to highlight the
corresponding function in the display, then use the data dial or [–]
and [+] buttons to assign the desired track.
You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT
button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
The track assignments of DOC files and
Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files are
fixed, and therefore cannot be changed.
Tracks can only be assigned when playback is stopped at the top of the song.
116
118
1/RIGHT
• Settings: 1 — 16
• Basic setting: Depends on file type.
2/LEFT
• Settings: 1 — 16, -- (off)
• Basic setting: Depends on file type.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Playback
■ Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts ................
The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be selected in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display.
Press L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding function in
the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT
parts by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also select a voice by using the L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲.
The playback voice can only be changed
when playback is stopped at the top of
the song.
Overall Song Playback Volume Control
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider can be used to control the
overall volume of song playback.
When you enter the Song Play mode, the song volume level is automatically set to the volume level that was last set in the Song Play mode,
regardless of the slider’s position. After that, moving the slider will set
the volume to the corresponding level.
If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on
during playback of an original song that
was recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/
700/103, the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME]
control will affect the level of the Auto
Accompaniment rather than that of song
playback.
VOLUME
117
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
CVP-109/107/105/700
119
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Adjustment of Track Settings
To adjust the playback volume, voice, and pan settings, as well as the
reverb, chorus, and effect depth for individual tracks, press the [MIXER]
button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER display.
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
CVP-109/107/700
You can use the MIXER display to set the parameters listed below.
See the indicated reference pages for descriptions of each parameter.
The Program Change Number (PRG#),
Bank LSB (BNK LSB), and Bank MSB
(BNK MSB) parameters, which are used
to select voices via MIDI, are displayed
when VOICE is selected.
Parameters available in the MIXER display
● When track 1 — 16 is selected:
● When TTL (Total) is selected:
• VOLUME (See page 37.)
• TEMPO (See page 27.)
• VOICE (See page 31.)
• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 49.)
• PAN (See page 37.)
• REVERB TYPE (See page 49.)
• REVERB DEPTH (See page 50.)
• CHORUS TYPE (See page 52.)
• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 53.)
• EFFECT TYPE (CVP-105)
(See page 59.)
• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 57 or 60.)
• EFFECT1 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700)
(See page 56.)
Depending on the file type, some parameters cannot be changed. For such parameters, a “Fixed” indication is shown.
If you select the REVERB DEPTH parameter while editing a track that was
recorded using Natural Reverb (CVP109), the parameter name will appear as
“NATURAL REVERB DEPTH” in the
display.
• EFFECT2 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700)
(See page 56.)
On the CVP-109, the REVERB TYPE
setting can be used to select a normal
reverb type, but not a Natural Reverb
type.
On the CVP-109/107/700, each of the
two effect systems can be applied to a
single track only. When you select EFFECT1 TYPE or EFFECT2 TYPE, the
number of the affected track is displayed
along with the effect type. When you
select EFFECT DEPTH, the number of
the effect system applied to the selected
track is displayed along with the effect
depth value. (The EFFECT DEPTH
setting is only available for the two tracks
to which an effect system has been
applied.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
118
120
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Playback
Changing Settings in the MIXER Display
Z Select the track to be changed. .........................................................
Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TTL
(Total) will change the overall settings of the song rather than the settings of individual tracks.
Press the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or
SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the
selected track.
CVP-109/107/700
X Select the parameter to be edited. ..................................................
Press SELECT ▼ or ▲ to select the desired parameter.
Depending on the file type, voice
changes may only be possible for tracks
1 and 2.
CVP-109/107/700
Current value for
the selected track
Parameter selected
for editing
Selected track is
highlighted.
• Selecting TTL and changing the
REVERB DEPTH value will also affect
the sound of your keyboard performance.
• The voices of tracks to which Auto
Accompaniment, rhythm, and harmony
data have been recorded can also be
changed.
C Edit the value or setting. ............................................................................
119
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the value or setting.
You can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back,
letting you immediately hear the results of your edits.
• Volume range: 0 — 127
• If another song is selected, all settings
will return to the basic settings for the
song (or the settings used to record
the song).
• If the Auto Accompaniment is turned
on during playback of an original song
that was recorded on the CVP-109/
107/105/700/103, the MIXER display
will function as Auto Accompaniment
Part Volume Control (page 77) instead
of Song Track Volume Control.
CVP-109/107/105/700
121
Song Playback
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Repeat Functions
The Clavinova has convenient repeat functions that let you repeatedly
play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is
useful when you want to practice a difficult phrase.
Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from
the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4).
Four Repeat modes
• OFF (Repeat function is turned off)
• PHRASE (Phrase Repeat)
• 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat)
• AB mode (AB Repeat)
• The ALL or RANDOM playback mode
(in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display)
will be disengaged when any of the
Repeat modes are selected.
• Any previously set Repeat mode will
be reset to OFF when a different song
is selected.
■ Phrase Repeat .......................................................................................................
When playing back Yamaha software that includes special phrase
marks, such as DOC files, you can select specific phrase numbers (as
indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly practice only
the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the four songs for
which notation is provided in the included Music Book.)
If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons,
the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at
the right of the button. Press PHRASE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then select the phrase number by using
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE ▼ or ▲.
Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back
repeatedly until playback is stopped.
CVP-109/107/105/700
• The Guide function can also be used
simultaneously with Phrase Repeat.
• When Phrase Repeat is started, a
lead-in count automatically plays
before the phrase. However, for freetempo songs, a lead-in count is not
available.
120
122
• Parts can be turned on/off even during
the performance.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Playback
■ 1 Song Repeat ........................................................................................................
When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲
button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeatedly until stopped.
Lead-in count is not played.
■ AB Repeat ...................................................................................................................
This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and
point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section
for practice.
When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons,
A ➔ and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to specify
points A and B.
• The specified A and B points will be
erased when a new song number or
another Repeat mode is selected.
• A lead-in count automatically plays
before the specified section A–B Repeat playback is started. However, for
free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is
not available.
• To specify the A point as the beginning of the song, press A ➔ before
playback starts. In this case a lead-in
count is not available.
• Specifying only the A point results in
repeat playback between the A point
and the end of the song.
• The B point cannot be selected unless
an A point is selected.
While the song is playing back, press the A ➔ button once at the beginning of the section to be repeated.
➾ Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated.
Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B)
will begin automatically.
121
The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or
a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played back
repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP] button.
When both the A and B points have been specified, you can clear the
A and B points by pressing the A ➔ button, or just the B point by pressing the B button. You can then specify other A and B points within the
song.
CVP-109/107/105/700
123
Song Playback
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
Other Playback Controls
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
■ Pause .............................................................................................................................
Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop
song playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to
resume playback from the same point.
Using the [REW] button may cause the
voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.
■ Rewind and Fast Forward .......................................................................
Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the
playback point of the song.
• While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons
can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure
at a time. Holding down either button continuously moves through
the song in the corresponding direction.
• During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the
playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No
sound is produced during [REW] operation.
Playing Other Types of Music Data
■ About Compatible Software ..................................................................
The CVP-109/107/105/700 can play back the following types of software.
The Lyric Display function (page 129)
cannot be used with song data recorded
in SMF format 1.
• Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ
• Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC
Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 229) for information
on the voice allocation formats and sequence formats.
The internal tone generator of the CVP-109/107/105/700 automatically resets for compatibility with either the Yamaha XG format (including GM System Level 1) or the Yamaha DOC voice allocation (page
229), depending on the playback data. (However, the selected voice allocation on the panel will not change.)
■ Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments ........................
Song data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/
87A/59S/69A/69/79A/89/92/94/96/98/600/103) will normally be played
back with the correct voices even though the volume balance may be
slightly different. However, data recorded using the Auto Accompaniment
function of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played back properly.
Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back.
CVP-109/107/105/700
122
124
Regardless of the type of software, only
the following disk formats can be used:
3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format and 3.5"
2HD 1.44 megabyte format.
○
Guide Control
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova has a special Guide function which allows you to
practice by using the appropriate disk software. The “piano roll”
display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you
should play, and when you should play them. You can even
practice at your own pace since the Clavinova pauses playback
of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys. (You can
try out the Guide function by pressing one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in
the Demo mode.)
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
GUIDE CONTROL
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
EASY PLAY
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
MIN
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
DIRECT ACCESS
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Keyboard guide lamps
Guide Methods and Piano Roll
The Clavinova has three different Guide methods that can be selected
depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning players
should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note, then Sound
Repeat.
“FOLLOW LIGHTS” and “CueTIME”
software should be used with the Next
Note method, as the Easy Play and
Sound Repeat methods may not function
properly with such software.
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
■ Practicing the Timing: Easy Play .....................................................
Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the
notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play
back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompaniment plays back normally in tempo.)
■ Practicing the Notes: Next Note .......................................................
123
The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking
at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the
Clavinova waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct
note, you can practice at your own pace.
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by
changing from lit-up to flashing.
If the guide lamps do not flash…
The guide lamps may not flash in the
case of a few songs because of a special
guide system. In case of such songs,
however, you can switch to the Next Note
method so that the lamps flash, if you
like. See the “Other Guide-related Functions” on page 128.
If the guide lamps and piano roll are
transposed up or down…
The guide lamps and piano roll may be
transposed up or down by one or two
octaves for certain songs. The guide
lamps and piano roll will not indicate
notes exceeding the 88-key range of the
keyboard.
CVP-109/107/105/700
125
Guide Control
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Practicing Phrase-by-Phrase with the Playback:
Sound Repeat .......................................................................................................
In the Sound Repeat method, the Clavinova plays back a short phrase.
Listen to the phrase and practice.
As soon as you play the phrase correctly, the Clavinova will automatically play the next phrase.
● Piano Roll
To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL
button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of
the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the
display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar
reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the correct duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display.
Number of Repeats
You can set the number of times the
phrase will be repeated in the SONG
PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display
page 5). (See page 129.)
The keyboard guide lamps can be turned
on or off as desired in the SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).
(See page 129.)
Piano Roll ON/OFF
The piano roll display can be turned on
or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE
MODE] display (display page 5). (See
page 129.)
Using the Guide Function
Z Set up the desired song for practicing. .....................................
Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before calling up the Guide function.
➾ Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice yourself from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1).
CVP-109/107/105/700
Auto Part Cancel
If you turn on the Guide function without
canceling playback of the part to be
practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided (or the
2/LEFT part is guided when the 1/RIGHT
part contains no data). However, when
you cancel the part before turning on
Guide, the setting will be kept until the
song is changed.
124
126
Before Practicing
Before starting to practice, play back the
entire song without canceling the part to
be practiced and listen to it carefully. This
will give you a clear idea of how the song
should be played, and will make your
practice sessions progress more
smoothly.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Guide
Control
X Select the Guide method. .........................................................................
Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY],
[NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT].
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
Turning Off the Keyboard Guide
Lamps
The keyboard guide lamp can be turned
on and off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE
MODE] display. (See page 128.)
SOUND
REPEAT
➔ The lamp of the corresponding button lights.
When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons
cannot be turned on…
The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be
used only in the Song Play mode or
when the “4. GUIDE Demo” song is
selected in the Demo mode. Only one
Guide mode can be selected at a time.
C Practice the part. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback.
➔ The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompaniment.
Piano Roll On/Off
The piano roll display can be turned on or
off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]
display (display page 5). (See page 128.)
The correct melody plays back no matter
which note you play in the EASY PLAY
mode.
The Guide method can be changed
during playback. However, the Guide
method cannot be changed for songs in
which SPECIAL is indicated in the
GUIDE MODE location in SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] (display page 5).
The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in
the Next Note or Sound Repeat methods.
V Stop your practice session. ..................................................................
The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the
end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the
[PLAY/STOP] button.
To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button - [EASY
PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] - so that the lamp turns
off.
• The keyboard guide lamps light corresponding to the notes played by the 1/
RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song
playback, even when Guide is set to
off - unless the LAMP button is turned
off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]
display. The guide lamps indicate the
notes to be played by both the 1/
RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when both
are turned on or off; when only one of
the parts is turned off, the lamps indicate the notes to be played by the part
that is turned off.
125
• The guide part can be selected, the
piano roll and guide lamps can be
turned on and off, and the Guide function itself can be turned on or off during
playback.
CVP-109/107/105/700
127
Guide Control
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
• Playback tempo can be set to any
desired value after a song has been
selected by using the TEMPO [–] and
[+] buttons.
• The Guide function may not work
properly with software which was not
produced for independent left- and
right-hand playback.
• Since the Guide phrases used in the
Sound Repeat method are automatically determined by the Clavinova,
they may not precisely match the
actual musical phrases. Also, the
phrases may become shorter when the
Guide function is used for both the leftand right-hand parts.
Other Guide-related Functions
Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG
PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).
The settings made in this display will also
be effective in the Guide function during
playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in
the Demo mode.
• The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only
for songs which have data in both the
[1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts.
■ GUIDE MODE .........................................................................................................
NORMAL is usually displayed as the setting of the GUIDE MODE
function in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. Change the setting to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE button; the part
which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1) can then be played with the regular Part Cancel function
and the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played with the Easy
Play function.
When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE
MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song.
To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button
so that the indication changes to NORMAL.
• The ENSEMBLE mode cannot be used
when Next Note or Sound Repeat is
selected.
• The GUIDE MODE setting can only be
changed when playback is stopped at
the beginning of a song.
• The SPECIAL indication appears
automatically depending on the song
being played back. The SPECIAL
indication will not appear, even when
pressing the GUIDE MODE button,
when playing back songs that do not
feature the special method.
• When using the Easy Play or Sound
Repeat method, the respective method
is still active, even if the SPECIAL
indication is shown.
GUIDE MODE
• Settings: NORMAL, ENSEMBLE,
(SPECIAL)
• Basic setting: NORMAL or SPECIAL
(depends on song)
CVP-109/107/105/700
126
128
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Guide
Control
■ Setting the Sound Repeat Number .............................................
To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Repeat mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is selected, only the notes which have not been played correctly are repeated; the Guide function will automatically go on to the next phrase
once the previous one has been played properly.
SOUND REPEAT
• Settings: AUTO, 2 — 10
• Basic setting: AUTO
The SOUND REPEAT setting can only be
changed when playback is stopped at the
beginning of a song.
■ Lyric Display ON/OFF ................................................................................
To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the function to OFF.
LYRICS
• Setting: ON, OFF
• Basic setting: ON
• The Lyric Display function cannot be
used with song data recorded in SMF
format 1.
• If a song does not contain lyric data, the
LYRICS function will display a row of
dashes (- - -). The LYRICS function
cannot be selected when playing back
such songs.
• If an XF song that includes chord data is
selected, the chords will be displayed in
the lyrics display.
■ Piano Roll ON/OFF .......................................................................................
The piano roll display can be turned on or off by pressing the
PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will appear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this
function is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback;
when it is set to OFF, the piano roll is not displayed.
PIANO ROLL
• Settings: AUTO, ON, OFF
• Basic setting: AUTO
When a song contains lyrics, the Lyric
Display function has priority over the Piano
Roll function. The Piano Roll will be displayed if you turn the Lyric Display function
off as described above.
■ Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF .....................................................
127
To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set
the function to OFF.
CVP-109/107/105/700
129
Song Recording
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova features comprehensive song recording functions that allow you to record your own performances to floppy
disks. Four recording methods are available: Quick Recording
(page 132), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track
Recording (page 135), with which you can record multiple
instrumental parts; Chord Sequence (page 141), which lets you
step-record Auto Accompaniment chords; and Step Edit, which
you can use to edit or record song data one note at a time.
• Up to 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the
amount of data contained in each song.
• Before you can record songs on a new disk, the disk must be formatted
for use by the Clavinova (see page 131).
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
DISK
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
ORGAN
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
NEXT NOTE
EASY PLAY
TAP
SOUND
REPEAT
XG
PAUSE
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
MIN
SONG CONTROL
STRINGS/
CHOIR
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
MIN
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
REW
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
1
Piano (right-hand)
2
Piano (left-hand)
3
Bass
4
:
9
Strings
:
Rhythm
10
:
16
Rhythm
:
Organ
REC
REGISTRATION
Sample song track chart
Part
PLAY/
STOP
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
● Structure of a Song
A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to
a different track, as shown in the example below.
Track
FF
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
PLAY/
STOP
• Refer to “Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks”
(page 9) for information on using
floppy disks.
• Songs recorded by the CVP-109/
107/105/700 are saved as SMF
(format 0) files. Songs recorded
using the [XG] category voices are
XG-compatible. See page 229 for
information on the XG/SMF (format
0) format.
(Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.)
Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the
display during operation. Refer to “Messages” (page 221) for information on the messages.
CVP-109/107/105/700
128
130
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Song
Recording
Recording Setup: Disk Format
Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to
format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted
for use. You can use the Format function in the FUNCTION [DISK 5]
display (page 200) to re-format floppy disks that have already been
used for recording.
Z Insert a disk. ........................................................................................................
Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk
drive face-up and shutter end first, until it clicks into place.
➔ A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a “Start
disk format?” message appears in the display. To start formatting, press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press
CANCEL.
The same display appears when inserting
blank unformatted disks, or disks of different formats.
Format Types
2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB, while
2HD disks are formatted to 1.44 MB.
DISK IN USE
Shutter
Label side of disk
X Execute the format operation. .........................................................
129
An “Are you sure?” message appears in the LCD display; press
YES to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it.
A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indicate progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the
previous display when formatting is completed.
CVP-109/107/105/700
131
Song Recording
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Quick Recording
Z Insert a formatted disk. ...............................................................................
Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks
into place.
The Song Play mode is not automatically
engaged if the disk is inserted when one
of the disk-related FUNCTION displays
(page 192) or the CUSTOM STYLE
display (page 92) is showing.
DISK IN USE
Shutter
Label side of disk
Write protect tab closed
(unlocked — write enabled)
Using Style File Disks
When using Style File disks, first load the
desired data from the Style File disk
(page 105), then insert the recording
disk.
➔ The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the Clavinova reads and recognizes the disk.
➾ If the Song Play mode is not automatically called up, press the
[SONG] button.
➔ The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears. If
the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown, use the PAGE [<]
and [>] buttons to select display page 1.
X Select the song number to be recorded. .................................
Select the SONG function, then use the SONG button, the data dial,
or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired song number for recording.
➾ Select a song number between 1 and 60.
If you select a song number between 61
and 99, you will not be able to select the
Song Record mode in step 3. The
Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs
on a single disk, but it can only record
songs in song numbers up to 60.
The selected number is the location where the song will be recorded.
If a song name appears beside the song number, the selected song already contains data. Make sure that it doesn’t contain data you want to
keep before moving on to the next step! If you record to a song that contains data, the existing data will be replaced by the new data.
CVP-109/107/105/700
130
132
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song
Recording
C Select the Song Record mode. ..............................................................
Press the [REC] button.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
➔ The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display (Record
mode page 1) appears.
• The song number for recording can be
changed in the QUICK RECORD display.
• If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on
when you enter the Record mode, the
ACMP&RHY track will automatically be
set to REC.
Songs Recorded on Other Instruments
• The Clavinova may display the “Convert
to CVP song?” message (page 223) If
you attempt to record data to a song
created on another instrument. Press
YES to convert the song before recording.
• When a song is converted as described
here, it may not be possible to record
data in tracks other than tracks 1 or 2.
Both 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT cannot be set to
REC at the same time.
Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons if the lamp
is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown.
Once you have entered the Record Mode, you can press [REC] or
[EXIT] at any time before step 6 to cancel recording without saving any data.
VSelect the part to be recorded. ........................................................
In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand part
(1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accompaniment
& rhythm part (ACMP&RHY). Press the appropriate button — 1/
RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY — to set the corresponding part to
REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). The
PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which already
contain data.
The ACMP&RHY part can be set to REC automatically by pressing
the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the rhythm, leave
ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP ON] button so that
the lamp goes out.
131
When a part is set to REC (recording enabled), the Synchronized
Start function is set to stand-by, and recording automatically starts
when you play the keyboard.
Recording the Harmony Parts
The Clavinova will record harmony notes
when you record with the Harmony function
(page 87) turned on. If the harmony type is
set to Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country,
Octave, or 1+5, the harmony notes will be
recorded in the selected track. When any
other harmony type is selected, the harmony
notes will be recorded in tracks 6 through 8.
Recording in Dual/Split Mode
• If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Dual
mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 3.
• If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Split
mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5.
• If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Dual
mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 4.
• If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Split
mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 5.
• When the recording part is changed,
[HARMONY] and [SPLIT] are automatically turned off.
Recording the Auto Accompaniment
• When recording Auto Accompaniment,
the rhythm is recorded to tracks 9
through 10, bass to track 11, and chordal
backing to tracks 12 through 16.
• The Chord Sequence function (page 141)
lets you record the Auto Accompaniment
without having to play chord parts in tempo.
• When any part is set to REC, the remaining capacity of the disk (in kilobytes) is
shown below the measure indicator in the
display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks
should have about 690 KB (about 69,000
notes) and 1400 KB (about 140,000
notes), respectively.
• When the ACMP&RHY part is set to REC,
the metronome will sound to provide a
timing guide before recording is started.
CVP-109/107/105/700
133
Song Recording
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
B Select the desired voices and style, etc. ................................
Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in the
normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out the selected voices, style, tempo, or other settings, be sure to do so before entering the Song Record mode in step 3, since the recording will start as
soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button.)
When Using Style File Disks
When using Style File disks, make sure to
load the data from the Style File disk (page
105) before inserting the disk for recording.
The Auto Accompaniment sections —
INTRO, AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE
IN/OUT — can be also recorded. Press
the INTRO button before starting to
record, the AUTO FILL buttons while
recording, the ENDING button at the end
of recording, and the FADE IN/OUT
button at the beginning or ending of the
recording. When the ENDING button or
the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at
the ending, recording stops automatically
after the ending pattern or fade out.
N Start recording. ...................................................................................................
Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To
record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in
the usual way (page 70), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the
current accompaniment mode (pages 72 and 73).
Recording Along with the Metronome
1. After selecting the voice, press the
[METRONOME] button, and set the
Beat parameter in the METRONOME
display. ➔The metronome will start
sounding.
2. The recording starts as soon as you
play the keyboard. The metronome
sound is not recorded.
When a disk is not inserted…
• A song can be recorded to internal
memory if it is short enough. A maximum of approximately 2500 notes (26
KB) can be recorded; however, the
amount may be less if other functions
are used. The internally recorded song
will be deleted when the power is
turned off or when another song is
loaded. See “Recording Without a
Disk” (page 174) for more information.
Adjusting the Volume While Recording
You can use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider and the MIXER display to
adjust the volume of the Auto Accompaniment part while recording. Adjust the
keyboard part volume using the KBD
VOL function in the display.
If You Turn the Harmony Function or
Split Mode On While Recording…
• You can record harmony notes or left
range keyboard part while recording
the 1/RIGHT part.
• When the 2/LEFT part is being recorded, the Clavinova will not record
the harmony notes for harmony types
that are recorded to tracks 6 through 8
(see the sidebar on page 133) or the
left range keyboard part.
The keyboard guide lamps do not light up
during recording.
CVP-109/107/105/700
132
134
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song
M Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
➔ Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to
disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display appears.
If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the
Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording
your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and
rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording.
If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the
[FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well.
< Play back the recording. ........................................................................
Recording
CAUTION
The Clavinova may continue to write
data to the disk for a short time after you
stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk
while the DISK IN USE lamp of the disk
drive is lit.
• When a song has been recorded, the
temporary name SONG *** (*** is the
number) will automatically be given to the
song. You can change the name as
desired. (See page 166.)
• The [ACMP ON] lamp automatically goes
out when recording of these parts has
finished.
• When recording is finished, the song
volume is automatically reset to the maximum setting, regardless of the current
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider position.
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
➔ The recorded data will be played back.
During playback you can use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] buttons to control the playback, and use the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons to
change the tempo. You can also play along on the keyboard.
Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is
reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at
any time.
• When style changes have been recorded
in a song, playback may become slightly
sluggish at points where the style
changes, depending on the styles that
were used.
• Playback of songs recorded using both
the Dual mode (page 38) and the Full
Keyboard accompaniment mode (page
69) may also sound somewhat sluggish.
Track Recording (Multi-track Recording)
Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................
The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the
same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 132.)
X Select the TRACK RECORD page ...............................................
133
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD
page (Record mode display page 2).
The 16 tracks appear above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks
which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the
track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a
highlighted number. The numbers of tracks that do not contain data are
not displayed.
CVP-109/107/105/700
135
Song Recording
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
C Select the desired track for recording. ......................................
Press the TRACK < and > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons to select the track.
➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected tracks to RECORD
(recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). When a track
is set to RECORD, the Synchronized Start mode is turned on. The
Clavinova will start recording when you begin to play on the keyboard.
PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a
track is muted, the track number is “ghosted” (shown in lighter indication) in the display.
Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when recording keyboard parts.
If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks
must be record-enabled.
If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously,
three tracks must be selected.
If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the recording track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below.
* If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are automatically set to record the Auto Accompaniment data. If the Harmony function is turned on and a harmony type (page 88) other than
Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5 is selected, tracks 6 through 8 are automatically set to record the Harmony
data.
• Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can
only be used to record the rhythm
sound of the accompaniment style and
cannot be used to record keyboard
part. Also, the keyboard part should be
recorded on a track other than those
used for Harmony or Auto Accompaniment.
• When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10)
or the Auto Accompaniment tracks (9
through 16) are set to RECORD, the
metronome will sound to provide a
timing guide.
• If the Auto Accompaniment and/or
Harmony are already on when the
Track Recording page is selected, the
corresponding tracks are automatically
record-enabled.
When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automatically selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to RECORD,
PLAY, or OFF using the rightmost LCD button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
134
136
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song
Recording
V Set all performance features as required. ..........................
After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary performance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb,
etc.
B Start recording. ................................................................................................
Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To
record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment
in the usual way (page 70), and finger chords in a manner appropriate
to the current accompaniment mode (pages 72 and 73).
The current measure number is shown in the display as you record. The
parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you play.
(Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and settings.)
If you want to re-record part of the song (for
example, if you’ve made a mistake in the
recording), you can easily do so with the
Punch-in/out Recording function (page
138).
Backing Up Your Data
Any time you have recorded some amount
of data, you should copy the data to another song number for backup purposes
(see page 196 for information on the Copy
operation). Doing this prevents accidental
loss of important data, should you inadvertently delete the data while recording.
Parameters Recorded for Each Track
Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song
• Notes
• Voice
• Keyboard volume
• Pan
• Right pedal (page 191)
• Left pedal (page 190)
• Center (sostenuto) pedal
• Reverb depth
• Chorus depth
• Effect depth
• Keyboard part volume (main, second, left)
• Fade-in/out (converted into volume data)
• Scale tuning data (page 209)
• Tempo
• Reverb type
• Overall reverb depth
• Chorus type
• Effect type*
• Equalizer settings (CVP-109/107/700)
• Accompaniment style
• Section (Intro, Main A through D, Fill-In, Ending)
* On the CVP-105, the last recorded track effect
takes priority.
Other Recorded Parameters
135
Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not
listed above includes:
• Accompaniment part volume (volume settings included in style data, plus mixer levels set when recording)
CVP-109/107/105/700
137
Song Recording
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
N Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
➔ Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has
been written to the disk, and the SONG PLAY display appears.
When recording is finished, the [ACMP/
SONG VOLUME] level is automatically
set to the maximum value, regardless of
the current slider position.
If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the
Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording
your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording.
If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE
IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well.
Adding New Tracks
You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record
track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can also play
back and monitor the previously recorded tracks while you record. By
repeating this process, you can assemble a complete song.
If you record on a track that has already
been recorded, the previous material will
be erased and the new material will be
recorded in its place.
Punch-in/out Recording
With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively rerecord specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you
to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously recorded track and stop recording at any “punch-out” point, leaving intact
all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punchout point.
Punch-in/out recording cannot be performed on tracks which have been used
to record the Auto Accompaniment or
rhythm parts, or on tracks 6 through 8
when these tracks have been used to
record harmony parts (see sidebar on
page 133).
Z Play back the song. .........................................................................................
Play back the song in order to locate the point where you want to
punch in (i.e., start re-recording).
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
CVP-109/107/105/700
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
136
138
REW
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song
Recording
X Pause before the punch-in point. ................................................
Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point
at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before
the punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing before you
punch in.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
C Turn on the Punch-in/out function. ............................................
Press the [REC] button.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
➔ The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears.
V Select a track. ....................................................................................................
Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons to select the track.
➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
137
Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected track to RECORD
(recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). PLAY can
only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted,
the track number is “ghosted” (shown in lighter indication) in the display.
Auto Setting of Punch-in/out
If no other track is selected, the last recorded track is automatically selected for
Punch-in/out.
If you select a track that was used to record
an Auto Accompaniment or rhythm part, or
a track (6, 7, or 8) that contains a harmony
part (see sidebar on page 133), you will not
be able to set the track to RECORD.
CVP-109/107/105/700
139
Song Recording
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
B Select the punch-in mode. .......................................................................
Select the desired punch-in mode with the fourth LCD button. Two
modes are available, as described below.
1ST KEY
Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after
Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).
PEDAL
Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after
Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).
When the PEDAL punch-in mode is
selected, the left pedal is automatically
assigned for this function only (the normal pedal function is canceled).
N Select the punch-out mode. ...................................................................
Select the desired punch-out mode with the center LCD button. Two
modes are available, as described below.
REPLACE
When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out
point will be erased.
PNCH.OUT
When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out
point will remain intact.
M Start playback and recording. .............................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from
the current paused location.
To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the 1ST KEY mode is selected, simply begin playing at the point from which you want to record.
To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the PEDAL mode is selected,
press the left pedal at the point from which you want to record.
When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is
selected, recording can be started directly by pressing the left pedal, without
first pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or
[PAUSE] button to start playback.
< Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
➔ Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the
[REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display reappears.
CVP-109/107/105/700
138
140
When the PEDAL mode is selected,
recording can also be stopped by pressing the left pedal.
Chord Sequence
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
The Chord Sequence function lets you enter Auto Accompaniment data step-by-step according to chord names. You can use
this function to record the accompaniment part without having to
play the song in time with the rhythm or at a certain tempo.
Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................
Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a
formatted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to
enter the Record mode.
You cannot use the Music Database (page
79) or the Registration function (page 108)
while recording data with the Chord Sequence function.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
➾ Select the RECORD EDIT 1 display (page 3 of the Record mode
display) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
X Turn on the Chord Sequence function. .................................
139
Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display.
When Chord Sequence cannot be turned
on…
The chord sequence function cannot be
used when no disk has been inserted in the
disk drive.
CVP-109/107/105/700
141
Chord Sequence
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
➔ The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears, the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, and the Fingered 1 accompaniment mode is
selected.
Changing the Auto Accompaniment
Mode
Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned
off while the Chord Sequence function is
active. However, you can select an accompaniment mode (other than Full
Keyboard) in the ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE display by pressing [DIRECT
ACCESS] followed by the [ACMP ON]
button. The split point can also be
changed in this display.
• The Chord Sequence data will automatically replace any previous data in
the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm
tracks that was recorded in the Quick
Record or Track Record modes.
• Up to 999 measures can be recorded
using the Chord Sequence function.
• The chord input resolution will be
automatically selected according to the
current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4,
4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord
can be entered on every 8th note or
8th-note triplet. For other time signatures, one chord can be entered for
each measure.
C Move the cursor to the entry point. ...............................................
The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note divisions.
To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to the
point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press one of the
CURSOR < or > buttons to highlight the function, then use the data dial
or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CURSOR <
and > buttons.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accompaniment
You can also enter volume changes for
the Auto Accompaniment. Used judiciously, these can help you create professional-sounding dynamic changes in
the Auto Accompaniment of your song.
To do this, first enter the Auto Accompaniment part volume data from the MIXER
display; the volume event symbol ( )
will appear in the box in the middle of the
display. To actually record the volume
data at the current position, press the
SET button in the CHORD SEQUENCE
display. (An initial volume event is automatically entered at the beginning of a
song.)
140
142
Entering Accompaniment Style and
Section Changes
One style change or section change
(page 143) can be made at the beginning
of each measure (The Intro pattern can
only be entered at the beginning of a
song.). However, Auto Fill data can be
entered anywhere you desire.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chord
Sequence
V Enter and set the chords and/or style changes. ..........
To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering in
the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point), or highlight
ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons.
You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT and/or TYPE
buttons.
The names of chords entered using the
keyboard are also displayed by the ROOT
and TYPE functions.
➔ The name of the chord is displayed next to the keyboard icon in
the box at the middle of the display.
➾ To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make
the appropriate selections in the normal way.
➾ Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET
button.
The chord name is indicated only at the first
beat of the measure line, except when a
style uses the 4/4 time signature, in which
case the chord name is indicated at the first
and third beats.
➔ A black box and the recorded chord name appear above the line
at the current position in the measure indicator, indicating that
the data has been recorded at that position. The cursor automatically moves to the next position.
The recorded data is also shown in the display: the time signature,
style name, and section appear at the top, and the chord name and
tempo in the box at the middle of the display.
A fade-out cannot be entered during a fadein.
Entering Rhythm-only Sections
You can also record the rhythm alone (without accompaniment) to your song. To do
this, record a blank chord in the desired
measure by leaving the TYPE function set
to “ ---.”
Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and
style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data
during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/
STOP] button.
The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.
Data Recorded by the Chord Sequence Function
• Accompaniment style
• Section (MAIN A/B/C/D, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break)
• Chord name
• Tempo
• Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings)
• Rhythm on/off
141
• ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)
Entering a Break
• A complete break can be created by
setting the chord type to “ ---” and setting
the rhythm sound to “OFF” (see
“RHYTHM ON/OFF” below).
• The “break fill” pattern triggered by the
left pedal (page 190) cannot be entered
using the Chord Sequence function.
• The Clavinova will normally play a fill-in
pattern as it switches between variations
(MAIN A through MAIN D). To have the
Clavinova change the style variation at
the start of a measure without playing a
fill-in pattern, press the button for that
variation twice before pressing SET.
• The measure number is shown to the left
of the measure indicator.
• For information on other useful editing
features, see “Other Chord Sequence
Functions,” below.
• The same chord cannot be entered twice
in a row. If the chord displayed by the
ROOT and TYPE functions is the same
as the last chord that was recorded, the
Clavinova will not record a chord change
when the SET button is pressed.
CVP-109/107/105/700
143
Chord Sequence
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
B Stop recording. ....................................................................................................
When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD
SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and
input an “end mark” which determines the location of the ending. The
end mark will be displayed in the box at the middle of the display.
Finally, press the [REC] button; the “Save recorded data?”
message will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automatically leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the
SONG PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To
continue editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL.
• The chord sequence data now resides
in tracks 9 through 16, and can be
played back in the normal way. Add
other tracks as desired by using the
standard track selection and recording
procedure. You can also record over
the Auto Accompaniment parts and
replace them with original material if
you like by using the standard track
selection and record procedure.
• The song recorded via the Chord
Sequence function can be modified
later by re-entering the Chord Sequence mode and making the desired
changes. However, keep in mind that
any data recorded over the Auto Accompaniment parts (with normal track
recording) will be replaced by the
preset accompaniment style data. (For
example, even if you’ve recorded your
own bass part, it will be erased and
replaced by the original bass pattern if
you correct the data in the Chord
Sequence display.)
Other Chord Sequence Functions
Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of
versatile functions that help you enter chord sequence data more efficiently.
■ ALL DELETE .................................................................
To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are
you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or
NO to cancel.
■ DELETE .........................................................................
To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE
button. An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute
the operation, or NO to cancel.
CVP-109/107/105/700
142
144
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chord
Sequence
■ END MARK ....................................................................
To enter an “end mark” at the current cursor location, press the END
MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the end
of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. (An
end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or Fadeout.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end
mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal data.
End Mark
Unless an end mark is entered, the song
will end one measure after the last entered
data. If an Ending pattern or Fade-out is
input, the song will end at the last measure
of the Ending or Fade-out.
■ RHYTHM ON/OFF..........................................................
143
To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF button followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced following
the location to which a “rhythm off” event is entered; the rhythm starts
sounding again from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is entered.
The rhythm on/off status is displayed in the
box at the middle of the display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
145
Step Edit
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Step Edit function gives you a convenient way to modify the
individual notes and control changes that make up a song you’ve
recorded. This function not only lets you change notes, it also
allows you to adjust the timing, length, and velocity with which
the notes are played. You can also modify other events, add or
delete events, or even record entire songs one note at a time.
Editable Events
SYSTEM Track:
Event Type
Description
Page
Tempo
Sets the tempo.
151
Time Signature
Sets the time signature.
152
Meta
Sets data not directly related to musical performance (such as lyrics, etc.)
157
Tracks 1 through 16:
Event Type
Description
Page
Note
Plays a note.
152
Control Change
Changes controller settings (such as volume, etc.)
153
Program Change
Changes the voice selection.
155
Pitch Bend
Bends the pitch of notes up or down.
155
Channel Aftertouch
Applies aftertouch to all notes.
156
Polyphonic Aftertouch
Applies aftertouch to a single note (see note, below).
156
System Exclusive
Sets instrument-specific data.
157
The internal tone generator of the CVP-109/107/105/700 does not support polyphonic
aftertouch. Although the Step Edit function lets you add polyphonic aftertouch data to a
song (e.g., for use by other MIDI instruments), this data will not affect playback by the
CVP-109/107/105/700.
Editing Song Events
Use the following basic procedure to edit song data you have recorded on a floppy disk. (See the “Song Recording” section in this chapter for descriptions of the various song recording methods.)
Z Insert the song data disk. ........................................................................
Insert a disk containing the song data you want to edit, just as you
would to record a new song (page 132).
➔ The SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears.
CVP-109/107/105/700
144
146
• To edit a song that you have recorded
in the Clavinova’s internal memory,
you must first use the Song Copy
function (page 196) to copy the song
onto a floppy disk.
• The Step Edit function cannot be used
to edit copied DOC files.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Step
Edit
X Enter the Record mode. .........................................................................
Use the SONG function to select the song you want to edit (see
page 132), then press the [REC] button.
SONG CONTROL
PAUSE
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
➔ The Record mode display appears.
C Select the Step Edit function. ..........................................................
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the RECORD EDIT 1
display page (page 3 of the Record mode display), then press the STEP
EDIT LCD button.
➔ The Clavinova displays the “Don’t remove the disk!” message and a bar graph as it reads the song data. After a few moments, the STEP EDIT display appears.
The Clavinova may not be able to enter
Step Edit mode while editing a particularly
large song. If this happens, the “Not enough
memory!” message will be displayed when
you select the STEP EDIT function.
Location
Right LCD functions
Events
Events
An event is one of the many pieces of data
(such as notes, control changes, program
changes, etc.) that make up a song.
145
CURSOR functions
CVP-109/107/105/700
147
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
V Select a track to edit. .................................................................................
Press the uppermost left LCD button once to highlight the track
selector, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the
track you want to edit.
➔ The track selector is highlighted, and the event data for the selected track is displayed.
Track selector
Settings: SYSTEM, TRACK 1 — 16
• System Exclusive events (see page
146) are loaded into Track 1.
• Meta events (see page 146) are
loaded into the SYSTEM track.
B Select a location. ...............................................................................................
Press uppermost left LCD button again to highlight the right side of
the location indicator, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to
select the measure you want to edit.
Measure
Beat Clock
➔ The selected measure is highlighted, and the beat and clock values are displayed.
➾ Repeat this step to set the beat and clock values. The track selector, measure selector, beat, and clock values are highlighted in
turn with each press of the uppermost left LCD button.
➔ The first four events that occur at or after the specified location are
displayed. The first of these events is highlighted.
N Select an event to edit. ...............................................................................
Use one of the bottom four buttons to the left of the LCD to select
the corresponding event in the display.
➔ The selected event is highlighted, and the timing of that event is
shown as the location in the first line of the display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Beat and clock
• The beat value can be set to any value
between 1 and n, where n is the
number of beats in the selected measure.
• Each quarter note is divided into 480
smaller units (numbered 0 to 479), which
can be used to set the timing of events
that don’t occur precisely on the beat. If
each beat is a quarter note, for example,
the location clock values of two eighth
notes might be set to 0 and 240,
whereas those of four sixteenth notes
would be set to 0, 120, 240, and 360.
Scrolling the Event List
• To display other events before or
after the selected timing, hold down
one of those four buttons, then use
the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons
to scroll the event list up or down.
• You can also press the TIMING LCD
button to select the double-pointed
arrow ( ) symbol in the leftmost
column of event data, then use the
data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to
scroll the event list.
146
148
Measure selector
• The measure selector can be set to
INITIAL (in which case the beat and
clock values are not displayed), or to
any value between 1 and 9999.
• The INITIAL setting is used to set
events (such as the voice selection or
volume events) that occur before the
song begins. (Actual song playback
begins with the first beat of measure 1.)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
M Select and edit a parameter. ..............................................................
Press the LCD button corresponding to one of the CURSOR functions to select an event parameter. (See the next two subsections for
descriptions of the event parameters.)
Edit symbol
TIMING parameters
EVENT TYPE
parameter
GATE TIME
parameters
NOTE NUMBER
parameter
VELOCITY
parameter
CURSOR functions
• Each of the CURSOR functions at the
bottom of the STEP EDIT display corresponds to one or more parameters in the
event list.
• The number and type of CURSOR functions displayed depends on the type of
event selected. (See the list on page 151
for details.)
• When a CURSOR function corresponds
to two or more parameters, press the
LCD button one or more times until the
desired parameter is selected.
➔ The selected parameter is reverse-highlighted (i.e., it is displayed in normal rather than reverse video).
➾ Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value
of the selected parameter.
➔ A pencil symbol is displayed to the right of the edit data to remind you that you’ve changed one or more parameters.
< Record your changes. ..............................................................................
Repeat step 7 as needed to change other parameters in the selected
event. Then, when you’ve finished editing the event, press the
button (the fourth right LCD button) to record your changes.
➔ The pencil symbol is removed from the edited event.
> Save the edited song data. ..................................................................
147
Repeat steps 5 through 8 to edit other events in the selected track,
or steps 4 through 8 to edit other tracks. When you’ve finished editing
the song, save the song data to disk as described on page 165.
• If you select a different event without first
recording your changes, the event you
just edited will revert to its previous settings and any changes you made will be
lost.
• If you don’t see the
function at the
right edge of the display, press the SHFT
button (the bottom right LCD button) to
display it.
Checking your Changes
• You can press the [PLAY/STOP] button
at any time while you’re editing song data
to check the changes you’ve made.
Playback begins from the top of the
measure that includes the currently highlighted event.
• You can control playback using the
[PAUSE], [REW], and [FF] buttons. (The
[REW] and [FF] buttons can even be
used while playback is paused.)
• When you pause the playback or press
[PLAY/STOP] to stop it, the most recent
event is highlighted in the display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
149
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Common Parameters
Every event contains three types of data: the timing, the event type,
and at least one event-specific parameter. Use the procedures below to
change an event’s timing or type.
■ Changing the Timing of an Event .....................................................
You can use the TIMING function to change the timing of an event.
Select the event whose timing you want to change as described in the
preceding subsection, then press the TIMING LCD button.
The first thing the TIMING function selects is the double-pointed
arrow symbol in the leftmost column of event data. You can use this
symbol to scroll the event list and display other events (see the sidebar
on page 148).
INITIAL timing
You cannot change the timing of an
event that is set to INITIAL timing. When
you select such an event, the TIMING
button will only select the double-pointed
arrow symbol.
Double-pointed arrow
Measure
Beat
Clock
The TIMING function also selects three parameters — the measure,
beat, and clock values — that determine the timing of the event. You can
change these parameters much as described for the location setting (page
148), save that you use the TIMING function rather than the topmost
left LCD button to select between the parameters.
Although the measure value selected by
the TIMING function has a range of 1 to
9999, the thousands digit is not shown;
hence, an actual value of 1000 will appear in the display as 000.
■ Changing the Event Type ..........................................................................
To change an event’s type, select the event you want to change as
described in the preceding subsection, then press EVENT TYPE LCD
button.
➔ The event type icon is reverse-highlighted.
➾ Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a different
event type.
CVP-109/107/105/700
• See the “Editable Events” table on the
next page for a list of event types that
can be selected.
• The Tempo, Time Signature, and Note
events cannot be selected at the INITIAL timing.
148
150
• The number of event-specific parameters that are displayed for a given
event depends on the event’s type.
See the next subsection for a discussion of the various event-specific parameters, as well as the CURSOR
functions that are used to select these
parameters.
• If you change an event to an event
type which is not being displayed in the
event list (see page 161), the event will
“disappear” after you record the
change (see step 8 on page 149).
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
Event-specific Parameters
Although every event has at least one event-specific parameter,
some event types require that several parameters be set. The tables
below list the CURSOR functions that are used to select event-specific
parameters, and the number of parameters selected by each.
Editable Events
SYSTEM Track:
Event Type
Functions
Parameters
Tempo
TEMPO
1
Time Signature
TIME
2
Meta
< and >
up to 35
Tracks 1 through 16:
Event Type
Note
Control Change
Functions
Parameters
NOTE NUMBER
1
VELOCITY
1
GATE TIME
3
CONTROL NUMBER
1
DATA
1
Program Change
PROG. NUMBER
1
Pitch Bend
DATA
1
Channel Aftertouch
DATA
1
NOTE NUMBER
1
DATA
1
Polyphonic Aftertouch
System Exclusive
< and >
up to 35
Use the procedures in this subsection to change the event-specific
parameters for each event type.
■ Changing the Tempo ...................................................................................
Select the Tempo event you want to edit in the event list for the
SYSTEM track.
Tempo
Range: 32 — 280
Tempo
TEMPO function
➔ The TEMPO function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.
149
➾ Press the TEMPO LCD button, then use the data dial or the [–]
and [+] buttons to change the tempo value.
CVP-109/107/105/700
151
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Changing the Time Signature ...............................................................
Select the Time Signature event you want to edit in the event list for
the SYSTEM track.
Time Signature
Settings: 1/2 — 4/2,
1/4 — 8/4,
1/8 — 16/8,
1/16 — 16/16
Numerator value
Denominator
TIME function
➔ The TIME function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.
➾ Use the TIME button to select the numerator or the denominator
of the time signature, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the selected value.
■ Editing a Note .........................................................................................................
Select the Note event you want to edit in the event list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).
Note number
Velocity
Gate time
Note event
functions
➔ The NOTE NUMBER, VELOCITY, and GATE TIME functions are
displayed above the third, fourth, and fifth LCD buttons.
Each note is defined by three pieces of data (in addition to the timing,
which is described on page 150).
● Note Number
The note number determines which note on the keyboard is played.
Use the NOTE NUMBER button to select this parameter, then use the
data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the note number.
● Velocity
The velocity setting determines how hard the note is played. Use the
VELOCITY button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the
[–] and [+] buttons to change the velocity.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Velocity
Range: 1 (min.) — 127 (max.)
150
152
Note Number
Range: C–2 — G8
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
● Gate Time
The gate time setting determines the length of the note. You can set
the gate time either by using the beat and clock parameters, just as you
would to set the location of the note event (see page 152), or by selecting
a note type from the third gate time parameter (displayed in brackets).
Edit
Beat value
Range: 0 — 99
Clock value
Range: 0 — 479
Beat value
Note type
Clock value
Use the GATE TIME button to select the beat value, the clock
value, or the note type parameter, then use the data dial or the [–] and
[+] buttons to change the value of the selected parameter.
When setting the gate time, keep in mind that the gate time of a
note is generally set shorter than the timing interval for an equivalent
note. For example, although the timing of consecutive eighth notes
would differ by a clock value of 240, the note type parameter automatically sets gate time clock value of each eighth note to 192. This prevents the notes from running together.
Varying note lengths
You can vary the playing style by changing
the gate time of the notes in a song. Decrease the gate time to make a note more
staccato; increase it to make the note more
tenuto.
■ Changing a Controller Setting ..........................................................
Select the Control Change event you want to edit in the event list
for the appropriate track (1 through 16).
Control data
Control number
Control Change
event functions
➔ The CONTROL NUMBER and DATA functions are displayed
above the third and fourth LCD buttons.
151
Each control change is defined by two pieces of data (in addition to
the timing, which is described on page 150).
CVP-109/107/105/700
153
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
● Control Number
The control number setting determines which controller’s setting is
changed by the event. Use the CONTROL NUMBER button to select this
parameter, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the
control number.
Control Number
• Settings: See table at left.
Controllers
Display
No.
MIDI Data
Bank-M
000
Bank Select (MSB)
Mod
001
Modulation
:
:
:
PortTm
005
Portamento Time
Data-M
006
Data Entry (MSB)
Vol
007
Main Volume
:
Pan
Exp
:
Bank-L
:
Data-L
:
:
:
010
Pan
011
Expression
:
:
032
Bank Select (LSB)
:
:
038
Data Entry (LSB)
:
:
Sus
064
Sustain
Port
065
Portamento
Sos
066
Sostenuto
Soft
067
Soft Pedal
:
:
Harmo
:
071
Harmonic Content
RlseTm
072
Release Time
AtckTm
073
Attack Time
Bright
074
Brightness
:
PortCn
:
Rev
:
Cho
Var
:
:
:
084
Portamento Control
:
:
091
Reverb Send Level
:
:
093
Chorus Send Level
094
Variation Send Level
:
:
DatInc
096
Data Increment
DatDec
097
Data Decrement
NRPN-L
098
NRPN (LSB)
NRPN-M
099
NRPN (MSB)
RPN-L
100
RPN (LSB)
RPN-M
101
RPN (MSB)
:
SundOf
:
120
:
All Sound Off
RstCnt
121
Reset All Controllers
Local
122
Local Control
NoteOf
123
All Notes Off
OmniOf
124
Omni Mode Off
OmniOn
125
Omni Mode On
Mono
126
Monophonic Mode
Poly
127
Polyphonic Mode
● Control Data
The control data indicates the new setting of the specified controller. Use
the DATA button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [–]
and [+] buttons to change the data value.
CVP-109/107/105/700
152
154
Control Data
Range: 0 — 127
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
■ Changing the Voice Selection ...........................................................
Select the Program Change event you want to edit in the event list
1 through 16).
for the appropriate track (1
Program
Change Number
• You can select a different voice in the
same bank as the currently selected
voice using a single Program Change
event.
• To select a voice in a different bank, the
Program Change event must be preceded by two Control Change events
(see the preceding operation) setting the
Bank-M and Bank-L controllers.
• See the voice list on page 3 of the Reference Booklet to determine the bank and
program numbers for the desired voice.
P.CHG NUMBER
function
➔ The P.CHG NUMBER function is displayed above the fourth
LCD button.
Program Number
Range: 0 — 127
➾ Use the P.CHG NUMBER button to select the Program Change
Number parameter, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the Program Change Number.
■ Bending the Pitch ...........................................................................................
Select the Pitch Bend event you want to edit in the event list for the
appropriate track (1 through 16).
Pitch bend data
Pitch Bend Data
Range: –8192 — +8191
Pitch Bend Range
The actual amount by which the pitch is
bent depends on the BEND RANGE value
set in the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display
(page 191) when song data is recorded.
DATA function
➔ The DATA function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.
153
➾ Use the DATA button to select the pitch bend data parameter,
then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the
value of this parameter.
CVP-109/107/105/700
155
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ Applying Aftertouch to All Notes .......................................................
Select the Channel Aftertouch event you want to edit in the event list
for the appropriate track (1 through 16).
Aftertouch Data
Range: 0 — 127
Channel aftertouch
data
DATA function
➔ The DATA function is displayed above the fourth LCD button.
➾ Use the DATA button to select the channel aftertouch data parameter, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the
value of this parameter.
■ Applying Aftertouch to Individual Notes ..................................
Select the Polyphonic Aftertouch event you want to edit in the event
list for the appropriate track (1 through 16).
Note number
The internal tone generator of the CVP109/107/105/700 does not support polyphonic aftertouch. Although the Step Edit
function lets you add polyphonic
aftertouch data to a song (e.g., for use by
other MIDI instruments), this data will not
affect playback by the CVP-109/107/105/
700.
Polyphonic
aftertouch data
Polyphonic Aftertouch
event functions
➔ The NOTE NUMBER and DATA functions are displayed above the
third and fourth LCD buttons.
Each Polyphonic Aftertouch event is defined by two pieces of data (in
addition to the timing, which is described on page 150).
● Note Number
The note number setting determines which note is affected by the
aftertouch event. Use the NOTE NUMBER button to select this parameter, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the note
number.
CVP-109/107/105/700
154
156
Note Number
• Settings: C–2 — G8
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
● Polyphonic Aftertouch Data
The polyphonic aftertouch data setting determines the amount of
aftertouch that is applied to the specified note. Use the DATA button to
select the polyphonic aftertouch data parameter, then use the data dial
or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value of this parameter.
Edit
Aftertouch Data
• Range: 0 — 127
■ Editing System Exclusive and Meta Events ......................
Select the System Exclusive or Meta event you want to edit in the
event list for the appropriate track (1 or SYSTEM).
• Exclusive data (see page 146) is loaded
into Track 1.
• Meta events (see page 146) are loaded
into the SYSTEM track.
• Meta events that cannot be edited will not
appear in the event list.
System exclusive
data
< and > functions
➔ The < and > functions are displayed above the third and fourth
LCD buttons.
Every System Exclusive or Meta event is displayed as a series of
two-digit hexadecimal values, each of which represents a byte of data.
➾ Use the < and > buttons to select a data byte, then use the
data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value of the
selected byte. Repeat to edit other bytes as needed.
System Exclusive Data
• First byte: F0
• Data bytes: 00 — 7F
• Last byte: F7
Meta Event Data
• First byte: FF
• Data bytes: 00 — FF
155
The Clavinova can only display the first 35
bytes in a System Exclusive or Meta event.
Any bytes of data beyond this limit cannot
be edited using the Step Edit function.
CVP-109/107/105/700
157
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Editing the Event Lists
In the preceding subsections of this chapter you learned how to edit
the various data parameters that make up an event. The Step Edit mode
also lets you add, delete, copy, and move events.
■ Adding an Event ..................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to add a new event to a track event list:
Z Enter the location of the new event.
Enter the event location as described in step 5 of the basic editing
procedure (page 148). If there is already an event at the desired location, you can select that event as described in step 6 of the editing
procedure (page 148).
➔ The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is highlighted.
When an event is added…
• When you add an event to the SYSTEM track, the new event appears as
a Tempo event with a tempo value of
120. At the INITIAL timing, a Meta
event (FF 01 00) is added instead.
• When you add an event to one of the
other tracks (1 through 16), the new
event appears as a Note event with a
note number value of C3. At the INITIAL timing, a Control Change event
(Bank-M, control data value 0) is
added instead.
• If there is already one or more events
at the specified location, a copy of the
highlighted event is inserted below it.
X Insert the new event.
Press the INS button (the second right LCD button).
If you don’t see the INS function at the
right edge of the display, press the SHFT
button (the bottom right LCD button) to
display it.
➔ A new event is added to the event list. The new event is highlighted.
C Edit the new event.
Use steps 7 and 8 of the basic editing procedure (page 149) to edit the
newly inserted event.
■ Deleting an Event ...............................................................................................
Use the following procedure to delete an event from an event list:
Z Select the event to be deleted.
Select the event you want to delete as described in steps 5 and 6 of
the basic editing procedure (page 148).
➔ The selected event is highlighted.
CVP-109/107/105/700
156
158
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
X Delete the selected event.
Press the DEL button (the middle right LCD button).
If you don’t see the DEL function at the right
edge of the display, press the SHFT button
(the bottom right LCD button) to display it.
➔ The selected event is removed the event list.
■ Moving or Copying an Event ..............................................................
Use the following procedure to move or copy one or more events to
another location in the event list, or to the event list for a different
track:
It is not possible to move or copy events
when editing the SYSTEM track event list.
(The MARK, CUT, COPY, or PST functions
cannot be selected when editing this track.)
Z Shift the right LCD functions.
Press the SHFT button (the bottom right LCD button).
157
➔ The SHFT function is highlighted, and set of different editing
functions is displayed at the right edge of the display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
159
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Select the event to be moved or copied.
Select the event you want to move or copy as described in steps 5 and
6 of the basic editing procedure (page 148).
➔ The selected event is highlighted.
➾ If you want to move or copy a series of two or more consecutive
events, press the MARK button (the top right LCD button), then
select the last event in the series as described in steps 5 and 6 of
the basic editing procedure (page 148).
➔ All of the selected events are highlighted.
Copying multiple events
• If you decide not to copy a series of
events, simply press the MARK button
so that the MARK function is no longer
highlighted.
• Events that aren’t displayed in the
event list (see page 161) will not be
copied or moved, even if they are
within the selected range.
C Cut or copy the selected events.
Press CUT (the second right LCD button) if you intend to move the
selected events to another location, or COPY (the middle right LCD
button) if you want to copy them.
➔ If you press CUT, any highlighted events are removed from the
event list. If you press COPY and multiple events were selected in
step 2, they are no longer highlighted.
V Select the destination location.
Enter the track and location where you want to move or copy the selected data as described in steps 4 and 5 of the basic editing procedure
(page 148). If there is already an event at the desired location, you can
select that event as described in step 6 of that procedure (page 148).
➔ The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is highlighted.
B Paste the data in the new location.
Press the PST button (the fourth right LCD button).
➔ Any events that were cut or copied in step 3 are pasted into the
specified location.
CVP-109/107/105/700
158
160
Pasting multiple copies
• You can repeat steps 4 and 5 to paste
multiple copies of the same data, just
as long as you haven’t cut or copied
other data in the meantime.
• Events that aren’t displayed in the
event list (see page 161) will not be
pasted, even if they were within the
range of events selected for cutting or
copying.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
Filtering the Event List
As you’re editing song data in Step Edit mode, you may at times
find that the sheer number of events makes it difficult to locate the data
you’re looking for. The Clavinova lets you simplify the process by
limiting the types of events that are displayed in the event lists.
Z Open the STEP EDIT [EVENT DISPLAY] page. ..............
Press the PAGE [>] button once or twice to display page 3 of the
STEP EDIT display.
X Select an event type. ..................................................................................
Use the ▲ and ▼ functions (the second and third left LCD buttons)
to move the selection bar up or down to the name of an event type that
you want to hide (or reveal) in the event lists.
Shortcuts
• To display only note data, just press the
NOTE ONLY button.
• To display all data in the event lists,
press the ALL ON button.
Time signature and tempo data is always
displayed.
➔ The selected event type is highlighted.
C Uncheck the event types that you want to hide. .........
Press the SET button to remove (or display) the check mark next to
the selected event type. Event types without check marks will be not be
displayed in the event lists.
V Return to the event list display. .....................................................
Note data will be displayed in the STEP
EDIT [NOTE RECORD] display page (page
2 of the STEP EDIT display) even when
there is no check mark by the Note event
type in the STEP EDIT [EVENT DISPLAY]
page.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed to hide (or reveal) other event types,
then use the PAGE [<] button to return to the event list you were previously editing.
159
➔ Only the selected event types are now displayed in the event list.
CVP-109/107/105/700
161
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Recording Music in Step Edit Mode
Page 2 of the STEP EDIT display contains functions that let you
record music one note at a time. Use the following procedure to add new
note data to a song that you’re editing in Step Edit mode.
Z Open the STEP EDIT [NOTE RECORD] page. .....................
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display page 2 of the STEP
EDIT display.
Location
Dynamic
Note Style
Note Type
X Select the location for the new note. ...........................................
Enter the track and location where you want to record the new note as
described in steps 4 and 5 of the basic editing procedure (page 148). If
there is already an event at the desired location, you can select that event
as described in step 6 of the editing procedure (page 148).
➔ The first event that occurs at or after the specified location is highlighted.
Recording from Scratch
• You can record an entire song in Step
Edit mode, if you like. Just insert a
floppy disk, select an unused song
number, and press the [REC] button to
start recording, then follow the procedure described here to begin entering
note data.
• When recording notes in Step Edit
mode, make sure the current voice
selection matches that of the track
you’re recording to. If a different voice is
used, the notes may be recorded at the
wrong pitch.
• When certain voices are used, the LCD
may display pitches one or two octaves
higher or lower than the notes that were
played. This is normal; during playback,
the notes will be played back as recorded.
• It is not possible to record note data in
the SYSTEM track, or at the INITIAL
timing in tracks 1 through 16.
• If you try to enter note data at the
INITIAL timing in tracks 1 through 16,
the note data will be recorded at the
top of the first measure (timing 1:1:0)
instead.
C Select a dynamic. ..............................................................................................
Press the first right LCD button to display the dynamic for the note
you are going to record. The dynamic you select determines the velocity
of the note. You can select one of eight dynamic symbols — from fff to
ppp — or KBD. If you select KBD, the Clavinova will record the actual
velocity that you play on the keyboard.
Dynamic
• Setting: KBD, fff — ppp
• Basic setting: KBD
➔ The dynamic changes each time you press the button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
160
162
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
V Select a note style. .......................................................................................
Press the second right LCD button to display the playing style for
the note you are going to record. The style you select affects the gate
time of the note. You can select one of three styles: normal, staccato, or
tenuto.
Note Style
• Setting: (normal),
(staccato),
(tenuto)
• Basic setting:
➔ The note style changes each time you press the button.
B Select a note type. ........................................................................................
Press the third right LCD button to display the type of note you
want to record. You can select one of three note types: normal, dotted,
or triplet.
The note type that you choose here will be used to modify the note
or rest length you specify in step 6, below. To enter a dotted quarter
note, for example, you would select (dotted) here, then press the
(quarter note) button in step 6.
Note Type
• Setting: (normal),
(dotted),
(triplet)
• Basic setting:
➔ The note type changes each time you press the button.
N Enter a note or a rest. ...............................................................................
● To record a note (or chord):
Hold down one or more keys on the keyboard, then press the LCD
button that corresponds to the desired note length (from whole note to
sixteenth note).
161
➔ The specified note data is added to the event list, and the timing
is advanced according to the selected note length. (If more than
one key was held down, note data for each key is recorded at
the specified timing.)
• If you press an LCD button without holding down a key on the keyboard, the
previously specified note data (i.e., dynamic, note style, and note type) will be
recorded.
• If there is already a note of the same
pitch at the specified location, the new
note will not be entered.
CVP-109/107/105/700
163
Step Edit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
● To record a rest:
Press the bottom right LCD button.
➔ The REST function is highlighted, and the note functions at the
bottom of the display are replaced by rest functions.
➾ Press the LCD button for the desired rest length (from whole rest
to sixteenth rest).
➔ The location is advanced according to the selected rest length.
➾ Press the bottom right LCD button a second time to redisplay the
note functions.
M Record a tie, if necessary. .......................................................................
If you have recorded a note or chord in the last step, you can double
its length using the TIE function. Press the fourth right LCD button.
➔ The gate time of the preceding note or chord is doubled, and the
timing is advanced to match the increased note length.
You can press the TIE button twice to triple the length of a note or
chord, three times to quadruple it, and so on.
< Record other notes. ........................................................................................
Since the timing value is automatically advanced when you record
notes or rests, you don’t have to set the timing for the next note. Repeat
steps 3 through 7 as needed to record other notes and rests.
> Save the edited song data. ......................................................................
When you’ve finished recording note data, save the song data to disk
as described in the following subsection.
CVP-109/107/105/700
162
164
Checking your Changes
• You can press the [PLAY/STOP] button at any time while you’re recording
note data to check the changes you’ve
made. Playback begins from the top of
the measure that includes the currently
highlighted event.
• You can control playback using the
[PAUSE], [REW], and [FF] buttons.
(The [REW] and [FF] buttons can even
be used while playback is paused.)
• When you pause the playback or press
[PLAY/STOP] to stop it, the most
recent event is highlighted in the display.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Step
Edit
Saving Your Changes
Use the following procedure to save the data you have edited or recorded in Step Edit mode:
Z Open the STEP EDIT page, if necessary. ................................
If you are currently using page 2 or 3 of the STEP EDIT display,
press the PAGE [<] button once or twice to display page 1.
X Select the save function. .......................................................................
Press the top right LCD button to select the
function.
If you don’t see the
function at the right
edge of the display, press the SHFT button
(the bottom right LCD button) to display it.
➔ The “Are you sure?” message is displayed.
C Select a song number, if necessary. .........................................
Use the SONG ▼ and ▲ buttons to select a different song number.
(If you do not change the song number, the original version of the song
will be replaced by the edited data.)
➔ The selected song number is displayed by the SONG function. If
a song name is also displayed, the selected song number contains song data that will be replaced by the edited data.
CAUTION
You cannot save the edited song data to
a different disk. If you remove the disk
from the disk drive before saving the
song (that is, before completing step 4
of this procedure), any changes you
have made in the Step Edit mode will be
lost.
V Save the data. ....................................................................................................
Press OK to save, or CANCEL to return to Step Edit mode.
➔ If you press OK, the Clavinova will display the “Don’t remove
the disk!” message and bar graph as it saves the data to the
disk, then redisplays the STEP EDIT page.
B Exit the Step Edit mode. ........................................................................
163
Press either [REC] or [EXIT] once to exit the Step Edit mode, or
twice to exit the Song Record mode altogether.
Exit Without Saving
If you try to exit the Step Edit mode without
first saving the data that you have edited or
recorded, the Clavinova will display a “Write
edited data?” message. Press YES if you
want to save the data, NO to exit the Step
Edit mode without saving, or CANCEL to
return to Step Edit mode. If you select YES,
the “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Follow steps 3 and 4 of the procedure at left to save and exit.
CVP-109/107/105/700
165
Other Record Edit Functions
○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Record mode has a number of other convenient editing
functions that provide even greater control over the song data.
The Record Edit functions include: Song Name, which lets you
name a recorded song file; Track Edit, which gives you a variety
of track-related editing controls, such as Track Mix and Track
Delete; Initial Edit, which lets you change the data at the
beginning of a song, such as voice, reverb, and effect settings;
and Setup Memory, which lets you save the Clavinova’s current
panel settings as part of the currently selected song. On the
CVP-109/107/700 there is also a Vocal Harmony Memory function, which you can use when you want to save the current Vocal
Harmony settings as part of the currently selected song.
You can select the Record Edit functions from the RECORD
EDIT 1 and RECORD EDIT 2 displays (Record mode display
pages 3 and 4) after selecting the song you wish to edit.
CVP-109/107/700
Song Name
This function is used to name song files recorded with the Clavinova
or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name function, press
the SONG NAME button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
164
166
The Song Name function cannot be used
when a disk has not been inserted in the
disk drive.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Record Edit Functions
Z Enter the desired name. .........................................................................
Use the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor to the desired
character position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12
characters in length).
➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select and highlight
the character or mark you wish to enter.
Press the CHAR SET button to enter the selected character to the
current cursor position and move to the next position. Continue entering other characters or marks in this way.
To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK
SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted
and the cursor moves back to the deleted position.
To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD
EDIT 1 display, press the CANCEL button.
X Register the name. .......................................................................................
When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to register it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To
cancel the operation, press the CANCEL button.
Track Edit
Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display to
call up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK
EDIT display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and
TRACK EDIT [QUANTIZE].
■ Track Mix (TRACK EDIT page 1)
The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified
tracks and copies the result to a third specified track.
Track Copy
Only tracks containing data can be selected
by the TRACK A and TRACK B functions.
In addition, “---” (no track) can also be
selected for TRACK B. In this case, the
data in track A will simply be copied to track
C.
165
For the Track Mix function, the selected
track voice and volume data, etc. (i.e., all
data except note data) in track A will be
effective for the destination track after the
mix operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
167
Other Record Edit Functions
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Z Specify the two tracks to be mixed. ..............................................
Press the TRACK A and TRACK B buttons to highlight the corresponding functions, and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the
numbers of the two tracks to be mixed. The voices which are used for the
selected tracks are indicated above these functions in the LCD display.
X Specify the destination track. ..............................................................
Use the TRACK C function to specify the track to which you want to
record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed data
by pressing the TRACK C button to highlight the corresponding function, then using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
Any previous data in the destination track will be erased.
C Execute the Track Mix operation. ....................................................
Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation.
An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the
Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel.
When the operation is completed, the MIX function will be replaced
by the UNDO function, allowing you to undo the Track Mix operation
and restore the previous data.
Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix
function.
You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT]
button.
■ Track Delete (TRACK EDIT page 2)
The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any
specified track.
• The original data will remain in tracks
A and B after the Track Mix function is
executed. If the old data is not needed,
you should delete it. (See “Track Delete,” below.)
• A bar graph indicating the progress of
the Track Mix operation will appear
while the data is being processed.
• You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and
stopping playback with the [PLAY/
STOP] button. (You should try this
before you do something that would
make it impossible to select the UNDO
function.)
• The Undo function cannot be used
once you’ve selected another track or
exited from this mode.
• The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 174).
Z Specify the track to be deleted. .........................................................
Press the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be deleted.
CVP-109/107/105/700
166
168
Only tracks containing data can be selected.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Record Edit Functions
X Execute the Delete operation. ..........................................................
Press the DELETE button. When the “Are You Sure?” message is
displayed, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel.
The DELETE function will be replaced by the UNDO function after the Delete operation is executed. If the result is not what you expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track.
To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp
goes out).
You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete function.
• A bar graph indicating the progress of the
Track Delete operation will appear while
the data is being processed.
• You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]
button. (You should try this before you do
something that would make it impossible
to select the UNDO function.)
• The Undo function cannot be used once
you’ve selected another track or exited
from this mode.
• The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 174).
■ Track Quantize (TRACK EDIT page 3)
You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all
notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example,
you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolution.
Z Specify the track to be quantized. ...............................................
Use the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be quantized.
Only tracks containing data can be selected.
X Specify the quantize “size.” ................................................................
Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired
quantize “size” as shown below.
32nd notes
3
16th note triplets
16th notes
3
8th note triplets
8th notes
3
quarter-note triplets
167
quarter notes
CVP-109/107/105/700
169
Other Record Edit Functions
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
C Execute the Quantize operation. ......................................................
Press the QUANTIZE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation
or NO button to cancel.
The QUANTIZE function will be replaced by the UNDO function
after the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you
expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized
track to what it was before performing the Quantize operation.
To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the
lamp goes out).
You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize function.
• Only the note data and voice data are
quantized.
• A bar graph indicating the progress of
the Quantize operation will appear
while the data is being processed.
• You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and
stopping playback with the [PLAY/
STOP] button. (You should try this
before you do something that would
make it impossible to select the UNDO
function.)
• The Undo function cannot be used
once you’ve selected another track or
quantize size, or exited from this mode.
• The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 174).
Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)
The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of
each track or the initial data set for the entire song after you’ve finished
recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the INITIAL EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT 1 display. All sixteen tracks
are displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such as volume, voices and reverb depth can be changed.
CVP-109/107/700
The following parameters can be changed in the INITIAL EDIT display. Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter.
Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit:
● When track 1 — 16 is selected:
● When TTL (Total) is selected:
• VOLUME (See page 37.)
• TEMPO (See page 27.)
• VOICE (See page 31.)
• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 49.)
• PAN (See page 37.)
• REVERB TYPE (See page 49.)
• REVERB DEPTH (See page 50.)
• CHORUS TYPE (See page 52.)
• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 53.)
• EFFECT TYPE (CVP-105) (See page 59.)
• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 57 or 60.) • EFFECT1 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)
• EFFECT2 TYPE (CVP-109/107/700) (See page 56.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
• The Program Change Number
(PRG#), Bank LSB (BNK LSB), and
Bank MSB (BNK MSB) parameters,
which are used to select voices via
MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is
selected.
• On the CVP-109, the REVERB TYPE
setting can be used to select a normal
reverb type, but not a Natural Reverb
type.
• On the CVP-109/107/700, each of the
two effect systems can be applied to a
single track only. When you select the
EFFECT1 TYPE setting or the EFFECT2 TYPE setting, the number of
the affected track is displayed along
with the effect type. When you select
the EFFECT DEPTH setting, the
number of the effect system applied to
the selected track is displayed along
with the effect depth value. (The EFFECT DEPTH setting is only available
for the two tracks to which an effect
system has been applied.)
168
170
• Any voice changes entered in the
middle of the original song will be
erased when the voice parameter is
changed in the Initial Edit mode.
• When editing some types of data, it will
not be possible to change certain
parameters (indicated as “Fixed”) or
change the voices for tracks other than
tracks 1 and 2.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Record Edit Functions
Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display
Z Select the track to be edited. ............................................................
Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing
the TRACK < or > button. If TTL (Total) is selected, any changes will
affect the entire song rather than an individual track.
X Select the parameters to be changed. ....................................
Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT ▼ or
▲ button.
The current parameter value for the
selected track.
The parameter to
be changed.
The selected track
is highlighted.
CVP-109/107/700
C Change the settings. ..................................................................................
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the settings. You
can instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be
changed during playback.
V Write the changes. .......................................................................................
When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press
the WRITE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed, press the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or
NO to cancel.
When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO,
allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the
edited track to what it was before you made any edits.
• If [TTL] is selected and the value of the
reverb depth is changed, the new setting
will also affect the keyboard sound.
• The voices of the tracks to which Auto
Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Harmony
data have been recorded, can also be
changed.
• The data may not be played back accurately if you use the [REW] button while
editing the data.
• All edited data for any number of tracks
within a single song can be written in a
one-time Write operation, by pressing the
WRITE button.
• You can check whether the results of the
Initial Edit operation are what you expected by starting and stopping playback
with the [PLAY/STOP] button. (You
should try this before you do something
that would make it impossible to select
the UNDO function.)
• The Undo function cannot be used once
you’ve changed the setting, changed a
different setting, or exited from the Initial
Edit mode.
169
CVP-109/107/700
• The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 174).
CVP-109/107/105/700
171
Other Record Edit Functions
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
B Exit the Initial Edit function. ..................................................................
To do this, press the [REC] button.
➔ The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is completed.
You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT]
button.
If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to
disk, a “Write edited data?” message will be displayed. Press YES to
write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit without writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode and
continue editing.
Setup Memory
The Setup Memory function lets you save the current panel settings to
disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back
the song being edited.
Z Set up the Clavinova to play the song. ......................................
Change the Clavinova’s functions to the settings you want it to use
when playing back the song you’re editing.
X Select the Setup Memory function. ................................................
Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT 2 display
(page 4 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the
SETUP MEMORY button.
• For details regarding which settings
are saved by the Setup Memory function, see the Parameter Chart on page
13 of the Reference Booklet.
• The settings saved by the Setup
Memory function will be deleted if you
re-record the song data or use Initial
Edit function (page 171) to edit the
initial parameter settings.
➔ The “Save panel settings to disk?” message is displayed.
➾ Press YES to save the current panel setup, or CANCEL to return to
the RECORD EDIT 2 display.
➔ The Clavinova displays the “Don’t remove the disk!” message and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then displays
a “Completed!” message before it returns to the RECORD EDIT
2 page.
CVP-109/107/105/700
170
172
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other
Record Edit Functions
Vocal Harmony Memory (CVP-109/107/700)
The Vocal Harmony Memory function lets you save the current Vocal Harmony function settings to disk so that they will automatically be
restored whenever you play back the song being edited.
Z Set up the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................
Set the Vocal Harmony function to the settings you want to use
when you play back the song you’re editing. See Chapter 8 for details
regarding the Vocal Harmony function.
Enter the Song Record mode first!
Since the Vocal Harmony function settings
may change if you enter the Song Record
mode after completing step 1, it is best to
enter the Song Record mode before you
begin this procedure.
X Select the Vocal Harmony Memory function. ..................
Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT 2 display
(page 4 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the
V.HRMNY MEMORY button.
➔ The “Save Vocal Harmony settings to disk?” message is
displayed.
• For a list of the Vocal Harmony parameters saved by this function, see page 14
in the Reference Booklet.
• To create Vocal Harmony data using the
Vocoder mode (page 185), it is necessary to create a harmony track and set
other parameters before selecting the
Vocal Harmony Memory function. See
“Adding Vocal Harmony Data to a Song”
on page 184 for detailed instructions.
➾ Press YES to save the Vocal Harmony settings, or CANCEL to
return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display.
171
➔ The Clavinova displays the “Don’t remove the disk!” message and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then displays a “Completed!” message before it returns to the
RECORD EDIT 2 page.
CVP-109/107/105/700
173
Recording Without a Disk
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova has about 26 KB of internal memory that you can
use to record a limited amount of song data — approximately 2,500
notes, if no other data is recorded — without using a floppy disk.
About the CVP MEMORY Song
If you enter the Song Record mode without inserting a disk, the
words CVP MEMORY will appear in the SONG display as shown below, and the Quick Recording, Track Recording and Punch-in/out Recording functions will become available.
• Chord Sequence data (page 141)
cannot be recorded to internal
memory.
• The Step Edit (page 146), Song Name
(page 166), Setup Memory (page 172),
and Vocal Harmony Memory (page
173) functions cannot be used when
editing a song recorded to the internal
memory.
• You can use the Track Edit (page 167)
and Initial Edit (page 170) functions to
edit a song in the internal memory.
When you enter the Song Play mode after recording a song in the
memory, the SONG function displays the letters CVP in place of a song
number. You can play this song back as you would any other song that
was recorded to disk (see page 113).
SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back
the CVP MEMORY song.
If you insert a song disk and select a song number when the internal
memory contains song data, a “Delete CVP MEMORY?” message
will be displayed. Press YES to delete the song data from the internal
memory. The song data will also be erased from the internal memory by
turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded data, use the
Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the recorded data to disk.
CVP-109/107/105/700
172
174
Song data recorded to internal memory
will be deleted when you load a style file.
In this case, no message is displayed.
CHAPTER
8: Vocal Harmony
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○ ○ ○
The Vocal Harmony function of the CVP-109/107/700 can automatically produce up to two harmony vocals based on a single
lead vocal. There are 42 different vocal harmony types, providing
a variety of different harmonization effects. Vocal Harmony can
also alter the pitch and timbre of the singer’s voice, effectively
changing his or her apparent gender — so that a male vocalist
can sing along with a two-part female vocal backup, for example.
STYLE
VOCAL
HARMONY
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
Using Vocal Harmony
Z Connect the microphone. .........................................................................
In order to use the Vocal Harmony function, you must connect a microphone to the [MIC.] jack on the CVP-109/107/700. See page 213 for
detailed instructions regarding the use of a microphone.
MIC. VOL.
MIN
MIC.
PHONES
MAX
MIC/LINE
X Turn on the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................
Press the [VOCAL HARMONY] button.
DEMO
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
173
➔ The lamp lights.
CVP-109/107/105/700
175
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
C Sing along with the Clavinova. ..........................................................
Start playing the keyboard, or play back a song in Song mode (see
page 113), and sing along with the Clavinova. The vocal harmony effect
will be added to your voice.
Depending on the selected vocal harmony type, you may also have to
turn on the Auto Accompaniment as you play — or play the keyboard
along with the song data — to produce an appropriate harmony. (See
“The Vocal Harmony Modes” on page 185 for details.)
V Turn off the Vocal Harmony function. .........................................
Press the [VOCAL HARMONY] button again when you’re done
using the Vocal Harmony function.
➔ The lamp goes out.
Vocal Harmony Samples
You can try out the Vocal Harmony feature as
you play back “3. Lyric Demo (Beautiful
Dreamer)” in the Demo mode (page 14) and
“O Come All Ye Faithful” on the Music Data
Collection Disk that came with your Clavinova.
To Get Good Results…
The Vocal Harmony function may have difficulty providing clean harmonies if the microphone is picking up sounds other than the
voice of a single lead vocalist. Here are some
tips that will help you get the best results:
• Use a unidirectional microphone, if possible.
• Don’t “double up” on the microphone.
• Position your mouth as close as you can to
the microphone.
• If the microphone seems to be picking up
the Clavinova, lower the [MASTER VOLUME] and [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] controls slightly.
• If the [OVER] lamp lights, adjust the microphone volume down slightly (see page 214).
Changing the Vocal Harmony Settings
You can change the vocal harmony type being used, as well as several
other parameters related to the Vocal Harmony function, using the VOCAL HARMONY display pages.
■ Displaying the Vocal Harmony Settings ....................................
To display the Vocal Harmony settings, press [DIRECT ACCESS]
followed by [VOCAL HARMONY].
DEMO
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
➾
HELP
VOCAL
HARMONY
➔ The most recently used VOCAL HARMONY page is displayed.
The VOCAL HARMONY display consists of three pages, numbered 1
through 3. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between pages.
CVP-109/107/105/700
174
176
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
■ Changing the Vocal Harmony Type .................................................
You can change the vocal harmony type selection in page 1 of the
VOCAL HARMONY display. Use the HARMONY TYPE ▲ and ▼
buttons to select a vocal harmony type, or highlight the HARMONY
TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Vocal Harmony Type
• Settings: See table on page 13 in the
Reference Booklet.
• Basic setting: MenChoir
➔ The selected vocal harmony type is highlighted.
Although the vocal harmony type is set
automatically when you select a song
that contains Vocal Harmony data for
playback, it is possible to change the
vocal harmony type as explained here. If
you do so, theVocal Harmony data in the
song will be ignored. (Once you have
changed the vocal harmony type, you
can recall the original Vocal Harmony
data by simply selecting the same song
again.)
You can also use the left and right LCD buttons while any of the VOCAL HARMONY pages are showing to select one of the vocal harmony
types listed in the display.
To return the vocal harmony type to its basic setting (MenChoir),
press either the HARMONY TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+]
buttons simultaneously.
■ Setting the Vocal Harmony Reverb Depth ...............................
When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies a
reverb effect — selected by the REVERB TYPE setting in the REVERB
display (page 49) — to the lead and harmony vocals. You can change the
amount of reverb that is applied to the vocal parts using the REVERB
function in page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
To set the depth of the reverb effect, select the REVERB function,
then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] keys to change the value.
REVERB
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 64
➔ The REVERB value changes.
When Vocal Harmony Is Off…
Reverb is also applied to the microphone
signal when the Vocal Harmony function
is turned off.
175
You can also advance the value by holding down the REVERB button.
To reset the value to its basic setting of 64, simultaneously press the [–]
and [+] buttons.
The [REVERB] button setting does not
affect the reverb that is applied to vocals.
To turn this reverb off, set the reverb
depth to 0.
CVP-109/107/105/700
177
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Setting the Vocal Harmony Chorus Depth ..............................
When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies a chorus effect — selected by the CHORUS TYPE setting in the CHORUS
display (page 52) — to the lead and harmony vocals. You can change the
amount of chorus that is applied to the vocal parts using the CHORUS
function in page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
To set the depth of the chorus effect, select the CHORUS function,
then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] keys to change the value.
CHORUS
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 0
When Vocal Harmony Is Off…
Chorus is also applied to the microphone
signal when the Vocal Harmony function
is turned off.
➔ The CHORUS value changes.
The [CHORUS] button setting does not
affect the chorus effect that is applied to
vocals. To turn this chorus off, set the
chorus depth to 0.
You can also advance the value by holding down the CHORUS button. To reset the value to its basic setting of 0, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
■ Setting the Vocal Harmony Balance ..............................................
You can set the balance between the lead and harmony vocal parts
using the BALANCE function on page 1 of the VOCAL HARMONY
display. Raising this value increases the volume of the vocal harmony
and decreases that of the lead vocal. If it is set to the maximum value of
127, you will hear only the vocal harmony from the Clavinova’s speakers; if it is set to 0, only the lead vocal will be heard.
Select the BALANCE function, then use the data dial or the [–] and
[+] keys to change the value.
BALANCE
• Range: 0 — 127
• Basic setting: Depends on vocal harmony type.
➔ The BALANCE value changes.
You can also advance the value by holding down the CHORUS button. To reset the value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [–]
and [+] buttons.
Because the basic setting of the BALANCE function depends on the
currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may
change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting
(page 177).
CVP-109/107/105/700
176
178
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
■ Changing the Vocal Harmony Effect Type ...............................
When the Vocal Harmony function is on, the Clavinova applies an
effect to the lead and harmony vocal parts. This effect is separate from
the effects selected in the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 displays (page 55).
You can select the type of effect that is applied using the EFFECT TYPE
function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
Use the EFFECT TYPE ▼ and ▲ buttons to select a different effect
type, or highlight the EFFECT TYPE function and use the data dial or the
[–] and [+] buttons.
➔ The selected effect type is displayed.
EFFECT TYPE
• Range: See table on page 219.
• Basic setting: KARAOKE1
When Vocal Harmony Is Off…
The selected effect is also applied to the
microphone signal when the Vocal Harmony function is turned off.
The [EFFECT] button setting does not
affect the effect that is applied to vocals.
To turn this effect off, set the effect depth
to 0.
To return the effect type to its basic setting (KARAOKE1), press either the EFFECT TYPE ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously.
■ Setting the Vocal Harmony Effect Depth ..................................
The EFFECT function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display
lets you set the depth of the effect selected by the EFFECT TYPE function in the same display page. To adjust the effect depth, select the EFFECT function, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] keys to change
the value.
EFFECT
• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
• Basic setting: 50
➔ The EFFECT value changes.
177
You can also advance the value by holding down the EFFECT button.
To reset the value to its basic setting of 50, simultaneously press the [–]
and [+] buttons.
CVP-109/107/105/700
179
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
■ Correcting the Pitch of the Lead Vocal .......................................
When the GENDER TYPE function (page 181) is set to a value other than
OFF, the Vocal Harmony function can correct slight inaccuracies in the pitch
of the lead vocal. The pitch correction feature is enabled using the PITCH
CORRECT function in page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
To turn pitch correction on or off, press the PITCH CORRECT button.
PITCH CORRECT
• Settings: OFF, ON
• Basic setting: Depends on vocal harmony type.
No pitch correction is performed when
the GENDER TYPE function is set to
OFF, regardless of the PITCH CORRECT setting.
➔ The setting switches between ON and OFF each time you press
the button.
Because the basic setting of the PITCH CORRECT function depends
on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function
may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting (page 177).
■ Playing a Clavinova Voice with Your Voice ............................
The Vocal Harmony function can also cause the Clavinova to play one
of the keyboard voices when you sing into the microphone. The
Clavinova automatically plays notes at the pitch you sing, using the
voice selected for the keyboard part you specify using the PITCH TO
NOTE function on page 2 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
Press the PITCH TO NOTE button to select a keyboard part.
PITCH TO NOTE
• Settings: OFF (vocals only),
R1 (main voice),
R2 (second voice),
LEFT (left voice)
• Basic setting: Depends on vocal harmony type.
➔ The setting changes each time you press the button.
Because the basic setting of the PITCH TO NOTE function depends
on the currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function
may change automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting (page 177).
■ Changing the Singer’s Apparent Gender .................................
Although many of the vocal harmony types change the pitch and timbre of the singer’s voice to produce harmonizing vocals with a different
apparent gender, the Vocal Harmony function can also change the apparent gender of the lead vocalist. This is accomplished by the GENDER
TYPE function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display.
CVP-109/107/105/700
178
180
GENDER TYPE
• Settings: OFF, UNISON, MALE, FEMALE
• Basic setting: Depends on vocal harmony type.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
Use the GENDER TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a gender type, or
highlight the GENDER TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–]
and [+] buttons.
➔ The selected gender type is displayed.
Gender Type
Description
UNISON
Produces an effect between those produced by the MALE
and FEMALE settings.
MALE
Adjusts the pitch and timbre of the singer’s voice to sound
more masculine.
FEMALE
Adjusts the pitch and timbre of the singer’s voice to sound
more feminine.
When GENDER TYPE is set to any value
other than OFF, the Vocal Harmony
function will produce only one harmony
note.
Because the basic setting of the GENDER TYPE function depends on the
currently selected vocal harmony type, the value of this function may change
automatically when you change the HARMONY TYPE setting (page 177).
■ Changing the Harmony Mode ...............................................................
The majority of the Clavinova’s vocal harmony types can produce harmony notes using one of two vocal harmony modes: Chordal or Vocoder.
These modes differ mainly in the way performance data is used to produce
harmonies (see “The Vocal Harmony Modes” on page 185 for details). You
can use the HARMONY MODE function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display to select one of these modes, or instruct the Clavinova to
select a mode automatically based on the current panel settings.
Press the HARMONY MODE button to select AUTO, CHORDAL, or
VOCODER as the harmony mode.
179
➔ The setting changes each time you press the button.
HARMONY MODE
• Settings: AUTO, CHORDAL,
VOCODER
• Basic setting: AUTO
• The HARMONY MODE value may
change automatically to either
CHORDAL or VOCODER, depending
on the current performance method, if
the HARMONY PART function (page
182) is set to a value other than the
basic value.
• The HARMONY MODE function is not
available when the current vocal harmony type uses either Chromatic
mode or Detune mode as the vocal
harmony mode (page 185). In such
cases, a row of dashes (- - -) is displayed in place of the HARMONY
MODE value.
CVP-109/107/105/700
181
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
If AUTO is selected as the harmony mode, the Clavinova will produce
harmony notes in either Vocoder or Chordal mode, based on the most
appropriate harmony part. The harmony part is selected automatically
according to the current performance method, as shown below:
Performance Method
Harmony Mode
(See page 181.)
Harmony Part
(See below.)
Playing keyboard in Single mode (page
31) or Dual mode (page 38)
Vocoder
R1
Playing keyboard in Split mode (page 41)
Chordal
LEFT
Playing Auto Accompaniment (page 69)
Chordal
ACMP
Playing back Acmp Assist data (page 81) or
song with Auto Accompaniment data (page 133)
Chordal
XF
Playing back song with Vocal Harmony data
As per Vocal
Harmony data
As per Vocal
Harmony data
If you select CHORDAL or VOCODER, the Clavinova will produce
harmony notes in the selected mode, based on the harmony part specified
by the HARMONY PART function.
■ Changing the Harmony Part ...................................................................
Harmonies produced using the Chordal or Vocoder vocal harmony
modes (page 181) can be based on different musical parts played — or
played back — on the Clavinova. When AUTO is selected as the harmony mode, the part used as the basis for the harmony is selected automatically according to the current performance method (see table above).
You can instruct the Clavinova to base the harmony on a specific part by
changing the HARMONY PART function on page 3 of the VOCAL
HARMONY display.
Press the HARMONY PART button to select the function, then use
the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value.
HARMONY PART
• Settings: R1, LEFT, ACMP, 1 — 16,
XF, OFF
• Basic setting: Automatically set by
AUTO harmony mode,
depending on performance method (see table
above).
➔ The selected value is displayed.
CVP-109/107/105/700
180
182
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
You can also cycle through the values by holding down the HARMONY PART button.
Part
R1
LEFT
ACMP
1 — 16
XF
Harmony is based on:
(Chordal mode)
(Vocoder Mode)
No harmony
Main keyboard part
Left keyboard part in Split mode
Auto Accompaniment chords
No harmony
Specified song track
Vocal Harmony data in XF/XG file
No harmony
• The HARMONY PART value may
change automatically if the HARMONY
MODE function is set to AUTO and the
performance method is changed (see
page 181).
• The HARMONY PART function is not
available when the current vocal harmony type uses either Chromatic
mode or Detune mode as the vocal
harmony mode (page 185). In such
cases, a row of dashes (- - -) is displayed in place of the HARMONY
PART value.
■ Locking the Vocal Harmony Settings ............................................
The current Vocal Harmony settings may be altered if you play back a
song that contains Vocal Harmony data, if you select a registered panel
setup (page 109), or if the Clavinova receives MIDI messages that
specify different Vocal Harmony settings. If you wish, you can use the
LOCK function on page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display to prevent
the Vocal Harmony settings from changing in such circumstances.
Press the LOCK button to lock or unlock the current Vocal Harmony
settings.
➔ The setting switches between ON and OFF each time you press
the button.
LOCK
• Settings: OFF, ON
• Basic setting: OFF
You can also use the Registration Freeze
function to prevent the Vocal Harmony
settings from being changed when a
registration is selected.
181
Select ON if you want to protect the current the Vocal Harmony settings.
CVP-109/107/105/700
183
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Using Vocal Harmony Data
Once you have set up the Vocal Harmony function according to your
preferences, you may want to save those settings for future use, or include them as part of a song that you will want to sing along with later.
■ Registering Vocal Harmony Data ......................................................
You can use the Registration function (page 108) to save your Vocal
Harmony settings as part of a registered keyboard setup.
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
1
2
3
4
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
■ Saving Vocal Harmony Data ...................................................................
You can use the SAVE operation in the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display
to save a registration file containing Vocal Harmony settings that were
registered as described above, or to save your Vocal Harmony settings to
disk (along with all your other current panel settings) as part of an All
Setup file (see page 192).
The Registration file or All Setup file can
be loaded later using the LOAD operation
in the same display page.
■ Adding Vocal Harmony Data to a Song ......................................
You can use the V.HRMNY MEMORY function in the RECORD
EDIT 2 display (page 173) to record your vocal harmony settings to disk
as part of a song that you’re editing in the Song Record mode.
If you want a song to include automatic Vocoder mode harmonies, set
up the song as follows:
The LOCK setting in page 3 of the VOCAL HARMONY display is not saved by
this function.
1. Record the harmony notes in one of the song’s tracks.
2. Select VOCODER as the harmony mode (page 181).
3. Set the track number from step 1 as the harmony part (page 182).
If you don’t want Clavinova to play the
notes from the harmony track during
song playback, set the track volume to 0
using the Initial Edit function (page 171).
Once you’ve completed these steps, you can use the V.HRMNY
MEMORY function to save the Vocal Harmony data.
CVP-109/107/105/700
182
184
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Singing with Vocal Harmony (CVP-109/107/700)
The vocal harmony settings that you save as part of a song will be
recalled automatically when you select that song for playback. (You can
override the Vocal Harmony data in the song by changing the settings in
the VOCAL HARMONY display before you begin playback, however.)
The Vocal Harmony Modes
The vocal harmony mode determines how the Vocal Harmony function applies harmony notes
to the lead vocal. Refer to the list of vocal harmony types on page 13 of the Reference Booklet to
determine which vocal harmony mode is used by a given vocal harmony type.
● Chordal Mode
When a vocal harmony type uses the Chordal mode, the pitch of the harmony notes is automatically determined by the Auto Accompaniment chords or the chord data in an XF song.
● Vocoder Mode
When a vocal harmony type uses the Vocoder mode, the pitch of the harmony notes is directly controlled by notes played on the keyboard or included in a specified song track.
● Chromatic Mode
A vocal harmony type that uses the Chromatic mode always produces notes at a fixed interval from the lead vocal.
183
● Detune Mode
A vocal harmony type that uses the Detune mode adds notes that are detuned by a specific
amount, thus adding a chorus effect to the lead voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
185
9: The Utility Functions
CHAPTER
The Function mode provides various advanced functions that,
for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you
greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations.
These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova
to your own musical needs and preferences.
STYLE
DEMO
8BEAT
16BEAT
HELP
SWING/
JAZZ
LATIN
VOCAL
HARMONY
MUSIC
DATABASE
BALLAD
COUNTRY
VOICE
CONTRAST
DANCE
ROCK/
R&B
BALL–
ROOM
TRAD/
WALTZ
PIANIST
BEAT
SONG
MIXER
ACMP/SONG
VOLUME
OVER
CUSTOM
ACMP ASSIST
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
TEMPO
DISK
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
METRONOME
GUITAR
DISK IN USE
SYNTHESIZER
PIANO
E. PIANO
BRASS
SAX /
FLUTE
BASS
PERCUSSION
ENSEMBLE
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
CHORUS
EFFECT
ORGAN
STRINGS/
CHOIR
FUNCTION
XG
GUIDE CONTROL
RESET
HARMONY
EASY PLAY
TAP
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SIGNAL
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ACMP ON
INTRO
MAIN A
AUTO FILL
MAIN B
MAIN C
START/STOP
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNCHRO
REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING
SONG CONTROL
START/STOP
PAUSE
PAGE
EXIT
REW
FF
PLAY/
STOP
REC
1
2
3
4
DIRECT ACCESS
BANK
BANK
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGISTRATION
The following functions are available:
Group
Display
Function
Tune
1
Transpose
188
189
Voice Setting
189
Left Pedal & Glide Range
190
Right Pedal & Bend Range (CVP-109/107/700)
191
4
Registration, Setup & Acmp Assist Files
192
5
Song Copy & Disk Copy
196
6
Song Delete
198
7
Song Data Transform
199
8
Disk Format
200
Send Channel (Keyboard)
201
Local Control
201
Synchronization
202
10
MIDI Filter
202
11
Receive Filter
203
MIDI Transpose
204
2
DISK
3
9
MIDI
Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony)
205
Song Transmission
205
Remote Keyboard
205
13
Backup
206
14
Recall
207
15
Micro Tuning
208
16
Scale Tuning
209
17
Video Out (CVP-109/107/700)
212
12
BACKUP
UTILITY
188
Key Touch & Fixed Velocity
KEYBOARD
PEDAL
Page
Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the
display during operation. Refer to the “Messages” section (page 221) for
information on the messages.
CVP-109/107/105/700
184
186
■ Using the Utility Functions .......................................................................
As the table on the preceding page shows, the utility functions are
divided among 17 display pages (16 pages on the CVP-105). Use the
following procedure to display the page containing a desired function.
Z Press the [FUNCTION] button.
SONG
MIXER
MASTER
EQUALIZER
FUNCTION
➔ The lamp lights and the most recently used page of the Function
mode display appears.
X Display the desired group.
The upper half of the Function mode display contains a list of the
function groups. As a shortcut, you can use the left and right LCD
buttons to display the function group containing the function you
want to set.
If you prefer, you can skip to step 3 and
select a page directly using the PAGE
[<] and [>] buttons.
➔ The most recently used display page within the selected group is
displayed.
C Display the desired page.
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display the page that contains
the function you want to set.
V Perform the desired operation.
Refer to Chapter 2 “Basic Operation” for instructions regarding the
selection and use of the various types of functions.
B Press the [FUNCTION] button when finished.
185
➔ The [FUNCTION] lamp goes out.
You can also exit the Function mode by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
CVP-109/107/105/700
187
Keyboard
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1
■ Tune ....................................................................................................................................
The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allowing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments.
The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed by the TUNE function. The
tuning can be adjusted up or down a maximum of approximately 26 Hz
(slightly over 100 cents) in 0.2-Hz steps.
TUNE
• Range: 414.8 Hz — 466.6 Hz
(–102.1 — +101.62 cents)
• Basic setting: 440 Hz
Hz and Cents
• Pitch is measured in units of Hertz
(abbreviated Hz), which represents the
number of times the sound wave vibrates in a second.
• A cent is a unit of pitch equal to 1/100
of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone).
• Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit
voices.
• The XG Master Tune setting is effective when playing back songs containing XG Master Tune data.
■ Transpose ....................................................................................................................
TRANSPOSE functions
• Range: –24 — +24 semitones
(–2 — +2 octaves)
• Basic setting: 0
The Transpose functions make it possible to shift the pitch of the keyboard or song data in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of
the Clavinova to the range of other instruments or singers.
The Clavinova has two transpose functions: ALL and SONG. The
former transposes all notes played by the Clavinova, whereas the latter
transposes song data only. When you change the setting of the ALL function, the SONG setting is also adjusted by the same amount.
CVP-109/107/105/700
186
188
• The Transpose function does not affect
the Drum Kit voices.
• When playing back songs containing
XG Transpose data, the XG Transpose
data is effective only for the data playback sound. The value set on the
panel affects the keyboard sound.
• The values set here affect playback
data transmitted via MIDI.
• When a Transpose function is set to a
high value, notes played in the corresponding range at the upper end of the
keyboard (e.g., C5 through C7 for a
value of +24) may not sound as expected. The same is true of notes at
the lower end of the keyboard when a
low Transpose value is set.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Keyboard
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2
■ Key Touch & Fixed Velocity ......................................................................
The Key Touch function determines how velocity affects the volume
of the voices played by the Clavinova’s keyboard. Select from four Key
Touch settings to tailor the keyboard response to the selected voice, type
of song, or your personal playing style. Press the KEY TOUCH button to
change the setting. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.
Velocity
• The amount of force applied to a key is
frequently referred to in this manual as
velocity. This is because the Clavinova
determines the amount of force that
was applied to a key by measuring the
speed with which the key was depressed.
• This function does not affect the actual
weight of the keys.
Key Touch Settings
NORMAL
This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the basic
setting.
SOFT
This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when
playing the keys softly.
FIXED
This setting produces a uniform degree of loudness, no matter how
forcefully or softly you play the keys. Use the FIXED VELOCITY
function to set the loudness of notes produced by the keyboard.
HARD
This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to produce
maximum loudness
■ Voice Setting .............................................................................................................
187
This function determines whether the basic reverb, chorus, effect, and
other settings for each voice are automatically selected when a voice is
selected. Press the VOICE SETTING button to change the setting. When
it is set to AUTO, the basic settings for each voice are automatically selected when the voice is selected; when it is set to MANUAL, the settings do not change when voices are selected.
KEY TOUCH
• Settings: See table at left.
• Basic setting: NORMAL
FIXED VELOCITY
• Range: 1 — 127
• Basic setting: 76
VOICE SETTING
• Settings: AUTO, MANUAL
• Basic Setting: AUTO
The following settings are automatically
selected when VOICE SETTING is set to
AUTO:
Function
Page
Reverb ON/OFF
46
Natural Reverb type (CVP-109)
48
Reverb system (CVP-109)
48
Reverb depth settings
49
Chorus ON/OFF
51
Chorus depth settings
53
Effect ON/OFF
54 or 58
EFFECT TYPE
56 or 59
Effect DEPTH
57 or 60
Effect VARIATION
56 or 60
HARMONY TYPE
88
Harmony SPEED
89
Harmony VOLUME
89
OCTAVE settings
37, 39, 43
RIGHT PEDAL function
191
(CVP-109/107/700)
BEND RANGE setting
191
(CVP-109/107/700)
CVP-109/107/105/700
189
Pedal
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3
■ Left Pedal & Glide Range ...........................................................................
This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of
various functions.
LEFT PEDAL
• Settings: See table at left.
• Basic setting: SOFT
LEFT PEDAL Settings
Setting
SOFT
The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting). (See
page 45.)
DAMPER
(CVP-109/107/700)
The left pedal functions as a switched damper pedal (see the
description of the SW.DAMPER setting of the RIGHT PEDAL
function on page 191). This setting is useful when you set the
right pedal to control pitch bends.
START/STOP
The left pedal functions as the [START/STOP] button. (See
page 64.)
HARMONY
When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is applied
only while the left pedal is held down. (See page 87.)
REGISTRATION
The panel settings registered to the next Registration number
are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed. (See page
109.)
REG.FREEZE
The left pedal switches the Registration Freeze function on
and off; that is, it performs the same function as the FREEZE
button in the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display (page 111).
ENDING/RIT
The left pedal functions as the [ENDING] button. You can
have the song end ritardando (slow down gradually) by pressing the left pedal twice in succession. (See page 67.)
BREAK
Pressing the left pedal during style playback produces a break
in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as the pedal is
held. When the pedal is released, normal playback resumes
from the next measure. If you press the left pedal a second
time within one measure, normal playback resumes immediately.
BREAK FIL
Pressing the left pedal during style playback causes the
Clavinova to play a special “break fill-in” pattern. This pattern
is different from the fill-in patterns produced by the Auto Fill
function. (See page 63.)
BASS HOLD
While the left pedal is pressed, the bass note played by the
Auto Accompaniment will be held even if the chord is
changed. This function does not work when FULL KEYBOARD is selected as the accompaniment mode (page 73).
FADE IN/OUT
The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE IN/
OUT] button. (See pages 67 and 68.)
EFF1 VARI
(CVP-109/107/700)
This function switches the effect variation on or off for effect
system 1; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the EFFECT 1 display (page 56).
EFF2 VARI
(CVP-109/107/700)
This function switches the effect variation on or off for effect
system 2; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the EFFECT 2 display (page 56).
EFFECT VARI
(CVP-105)
This function switches the effect variation on or off; that is, it
performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the
EFFECT display (page 60).
CVP-109/107/105/700
If the left pedal is set to REGISTRATION,
the setting of the left pedal function in
Registration memory is not recalled.
188
190
Description
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Pedal
LEFT PEDAL Settings (continued)
Setting
GLIDE UP S
GLIDE UP M
GLIDE UP F
Description
Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to rise an amount
specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is
released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of
three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the selected setting).
Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to drop an amount
specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is
GLIDE DOWN M released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of
three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the seGLIDE DOWN F lected setting).
GLIDE DOWN S
GLIDE RANGE
• Settings: 1 — 12 (semitones)
• Basic setting: 1
• On the CVP-109/107/700, the BEND
RANGE function may be displayed in
place of the GLIDE RANGE function
when the RIGHT PEDAL function is
set to BEND UP or BEND DOWN. To
display the GLIDE RANGE function,
press the LEFT PEDAL button and
select one of the GLIDE settings, if
necessary.
■ Right Pedal & Bend Range (CVP-109/107/700) ...................
This function lets you set the right pedal of the CVP-109/107/700 to
one of two damper modes, or to control upward and downward pitch
bends.
RIGHT PEDAL
• Settings: See table at left.
• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
CVP-109/107/700
RIGHT PEDAL Settings
Setting
Description
CONT.DAMPER
The right pedal functions like a standard damper pedal.
The sustain length is increased by degrees depending on
how far the pedal is pressed.
SW.DAMPER
The right pedal functions as a damper on/off switch. The
sustain length increases when the pedal is pressed, and
returns to normal when it is let up.
BEND UP
Pressing the right pedal bends the pitch upward to the
maximum amount specified by the BEND RANGE function.
BEND DOWN
Pressing the right pedal bends the pitch downward to the
maximum amount specified by the BEND RANGE function.
189
Because the basic settings of the Right Pedal and Bend Range functions depend on the current voice selection, the settings of these functions may change automatically when a different voice is selected. (The
Bend Range value will change automatically only if BEND UP or BEND
DOWN is specified as the Right Pedal basic setting for the selected
voice.)
CVP-105 Damper
The right pedal on the CVP-105 functions
as a damper on/off switch (see the description of the SW.DAMPER setting in
the table at left).
BEND RANGE
• Settings: 1 — 12 (semitones)
• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
• The GLIDE RANGE function may be
displayed in place of the BEND
RANGE function when the LEFT
PEDAL function is set to one of the
GLIDE settings. To display the BEND
RANGE function, press the RIGHT
PEDAL button and select BEND UP or
BEND DOWN, if necessary.
CVP-109/107/105/700
191
Disk
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4
■ Registration, Setup & Acmp Assist Files ..................................
You can use the functions on this page to load, save, delete, and rename data files containing registration data (page 108), panel setup data,
or Accompaniment Assistance data (page 81).
Before executing one of these functions, make sure that the disk you
want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive.
Z Select the file type.
Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file type to
be loaded, saved, deleted or named.
REGISTRATION
A Registration file may contain the data for just one
registration, or a full set of twenty. Refer to page 13 in
the Reference Booklet for a list of settings registered
by the Registration function.
ALL SETUP
An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the
list on page 13 in the Reference Booklet.
ACMP ASSIST
An Acmp Assist file contains a set of Accompaniment
Assistance data (see page 81).
➾ If you select REGISTRATION as the file type, you can also use the
REGIST function to specify whether the operation will affect one
memory location or a full set of twenty.
CVP-109/107/105/700
190
192
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk
When saving registration data, the REGIST setting specifies which
memory location(s) will be saved to disk. When loading data, the
REGIST setting specifies how the registration data will be loaded, as
shown below:
You can delete or rename any registration file on the disk, regardless of the
REGIST setting.
REGIST setting:
File contains:
ALL
A1 — E4
All
registrations
All registrations are loaded.
Only registration saved from
specified location is reloaded (to original location).
One
registration
Selected registration file is
Selected registration file is
loaded into original location. loaded into specified location.
X Select the file operation.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file
operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
File operations cannot be performed
while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the
Song mode before attempting to perform
a file function.
C Press the START button.
➔ The file operation begins.
The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation
you’ve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each operation below.
■ LOAD ............................................................................................................................
191
When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The
original internal data will be replaced when you execute the Load operation. Be sure to save all important data to disk (see page 194) before using the Load operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
193
Disk
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of the two
leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button
to load the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Load operation.
■ SAVE .................................................................................................................................
When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to
be saved will appear.
Press the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor, and select the
character position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve
characters.)
➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the characters
to be input.
Press the CHAR SET button to input the selected characters at the
current underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor
to other characters or marks and entering them in this way.
To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK
SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and
the cursor moves back to the deleted position.
To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION
[DISK 1] display, press the CANCEL button.
When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE
button to execute the Save operation.
If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same
name! Overwrite?” message will appear. Press the OK button to
overwrite the original file with the new file, or CANCEL to cancel the
Save operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
192
194
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Disk
■ DELETE .........................................................................................................................
When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear.
First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of the two
leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button
to delete the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Delete
operation.
■ NAME ...............................................................................................................................
When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear.
First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two
leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
➾ The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the
same way as described above for the Save function.
193
➾ Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly
entered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a
name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name!
Overwrite?” message will appear. In this case, press the OK
button to overwrite the original file with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the Name operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
195
Disk
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5
■ Song Copy & Disk Copy ..............................................................................
The functions on this page allow you to copy song data recorded by
the Clavinova to a different song number on the same disk, or to a different disk. You can also use the Disk Copy function to copy an entire disk.
The Song Copy and Disk Copy functions
cannot be executed while the [RECORD]
lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode
before attempting to copy a song or disk.
Z Select a copy function.
First insert the disk containing the source song, or the disk to be copied.
➾ Press either of the leftmost two LCD buttons to select the copy
type. Three copy types are available.
DISK1 – 1
This function allows you to copy a song to a different
song number on the same disk.
DISK1 – 2
This function allows you to copy a song to a different
disk.
DISK COPY
This function copies all the data from one disk to another disk. (All data on the destination disk is erased
by this process.)
X Select the source song.
• You will not be able to select DISK1 – 1
as the copy function if the disk you
inserted is write protected (page 9).
• If the Clavinova’s memory contains
song data recorded without a disk
(page 174), CVP – DISK will automatically be selected as the copy function.
If you want to keep the CVP MEMORY
song data, you can use this function to
copy it to a disk. (Insert the disk,
specify a destination song number as
described in step 3, then execute the
copy function as usual.) You can then
use the Song Delete function (page
198) to delete the CVP MEMORY
song. Once the song has been deleted, you will be able to use the other
copy functions.
If you selected DISK1 — 1 or DISK1 — 2 in step 1, press the
SONG ➔ button, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select
a song number from 1 to 99.
➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above
the third and fourth LCD buttons.
CVP-109/107/105/700
194
196
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Disk
C Select the destination song number.
If you selected DISK1 — 1 as in step 1, press the SONG button, then
use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song
number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.)
➔ If the destination song number already contains data, the name of
the song file will appear in the middle section of the display. In this
case, the original data of the destination song number will be replaced by the source song data when you execute the copy operation.
V Execute the copy operation.
Press the COPY button.
➔ The copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk, an
“Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to
continue or the NO button to cancel.
The copy operation cannot be executed if
the same song number is selected as
both the source song and the destination
song for the DISK1 – 1 function. In this
case, a “Select a different number!”
message will appear.
If you are copying the data to a different disk (or copying an entire
**
disk), a “Number of disk exchanges (**
**)” message appears
to indicate the number of times the disk will have to be changed.
Press the OK button to continue, or the CANCEL button to abort the
operation.
When copying data between disks, follow the instructions in the display, inserting the source and destination disks as required.
If you are using the DISK1 – 2 function to copy a song to another
disk, the “Select destination song number” message will
appear the first time you insert the destination disk. Use the data dial
or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1
and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.)
195
➾ If the destination song number already contains data, the song
name will appear in the display. In this case, the original data of
the destination song number will be replaced by the source song
data. Press the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort.
Copying Commercial Software
• Copying of commercially available
software is strictly prohibited, except
for your personal use.
• Some commercially available software
is purposely copy-protected, and cannot be copied using these functions.
Data files (other than those made with
the CVP-109/107/105/700/103) that have
been copied once cannot be copied a
second time to another disk. Also, additional data can be recorded only to the
right-hand/left-hand parts of the copied
DOC files.
CVP-109/107/105/700
197
Disk
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6
■ Song Delete ...............................................................................................................
You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be
careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the delete operation is performed, it cannot be undone.
The Song Delete function cannot be
executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit.
Exit the Song Record mode before attempting to delete a song.
Z Insert the disk.
Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk
drive.
X Select the song to be deleted.
Use the SONG ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the song to be deleted. The song data in the Clavinova’s
memory can be also deleted with this operation. To do this, select
CVP MEMORY instead of a song number (CVP MEMORY appears
only when the memory contains song data).
C Execute the delete operation.
Press the DELETE button.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES
button to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to cancel the operation.
CVP-109/107/105/700
196
198
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Disk
FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7
■ Song Data Transform .......................................................................................
This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP-109/
107/105/700 for playback on other Clavinova models or a Disklavier.
The Song Data Transform function cannot be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit.
Exit the Song mode before attempting to
transform song data.
Z Insert the disk.
Insert a 2DD disk containing the data to be converted in the disk
drive.
X Select a data format.
Use either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the target format
of the file (the type of instrument that will use the converted data).
The following three types are available:
CVP PERFORMANCE
This function converts data for playback on the
CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, the DOM30, and the DOU-10.
PIANO FORMAT 1
This function converts data for playback on all
Disklavier models except the MX100A and the
MX100B.
PIANO FORMAT 2
This type converts the data for playback on the
Disklavier MX100A or MX100B.
2DD Disks Only!
Only data saved on 2DD disks can be
converted. To transform song data that
has been saved on a 2HD disk or recorded in the Clavinova’s memory, use
the Song Copy function (page 196) to
copy the song to a 2DD disk before you
attempt to convert it.
Data Format Compatibility
CVP-series Clavinovas other than the
models listed in the table at left can play
back song data recorded on the CVP109/107/105/700 without conversion.
If you are planning to use your song data
on other instruments and want to ensure
that they will closely reproduce the sound
you achieved on the CVP-109/107/105/
700, however, we recommend using XG
voices (see page 32) for all tracks other
than those that play piano voices.
C Select the song to be converted.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the song number of
the song to be converted.
➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above
the SONG function.
V Press the TRANSFORM button.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button
to convert the selected song, or NO to cancel the operation. When
the conversion process is finished, a “Completed! SONG No.**”
message indicates the song number to which the data was saved.
197
If CVP PERFORMANCE was selected in Step 2, the characters “C)”
are appended to the beginning of the original name. If one of the other
formats was selected, the characters “P)” are appended.
• The converted data is saved to a song
number between 1 and 60. (Song
numbers above 60 are not used.)
• The original data remains intact at the
original song number even after the
conversion has been executed.
• Recording or editing cannot be performed on the converted songs.
CVP-109/107/105/700
199
Disk
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8
■ Disk Format ..............................................................................................................
Floppy disks must be correctly formatted before the Clavinova can
use them for data storage. If you insert a new, unformatted disk (or a disk
that has already been initialized in a different format) in the disk drive,
the Clavinova will automatically ask you whether it should format the
disk. (See page 131 for details.)
The Clavinova also has a Disk Format function that can be used to
reformat disks that have already been formatted for use by the
Clavinova. The reformatting operation deletes any data that may have
been saved on the disk.
Z Insert the disk to be formatted.
Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter
forward until it clicks into place.
X Execute the format operation.
Press the START button.
The Disk Format function cannot be used
while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the
Song mode before attempting to format a
disk.
CAUTION
Formatting a disk erases all the data
on the disk. Before you format a disk,
make sure it doesn’t contain any data
that you want to keep.
Format Types
2DD disks are formatted to hold 720 KB
of data; 2HD disks are formatted to hold
1.44 MB of data.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute
the format, or NO to cancel.
A bar graph indicates the progress of the formatting process. Once the
disk has been formatted, the Clavinova can use it to store songs and
other data.
CVP-109/107/105/700
198
200
MIDI
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9
■ Send Channel (Keyboard) .........................................................................
In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels (1 through 16) of the
transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data
transfer. The SEND CH function lets you set the MIDI transmit channels
for the keyboard parts.
Part
Explanation
LEFT
Left voice in Split mode (see page 41)
3
RIGHT1
Main voice
1
RIGHT2
Second voice in Dual mode (see page 38)
2
SEND CH
• Settings: OFF, 1 — 16
• Basic setting: See table at left.
Basic Setting
You can set each keyboard part to transmit on a separate channel. If
you set a part to OFF, the MIDI data for that part will not be transmitted.
● MIDI Reception
The Clavinova always receives MIDI data in the “Multi Timbre” mode. This is a mode in which the
Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an
external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the
Clavinova by using a computer or MIDI sequencer.
■ Local Control ..........................................................................................................
199
The term “local control” refers to the control of the internal tone generator by the keyboard. You will normally play the Clavinova with the
Local Control function set to ON.
Turning off the local control separates the keyboard from the tone
generator, so that the Clavinova will not output any sound when you play
the keyboard. Since keyboard performance data is still output via the
MIDI jacks, however, you can use this setting when you want to play an
external MIDI tone generator from the Clavinova’s keyboard without
sounding the internal voices.
To turn the local control on or off, press the LOCAL button. The data
dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.
LOCAL
• Settings: ON, OFF
• Basic setting: ON
CVP-109/107/105/700
201
MIDI
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
■ Synchronization ....................................................................................................
The playback tempo of a song or style is normally controlled by the
Clavinova’s internal clock. When you want the Clavinova’s playback
tempo to be controlled by an external sequencer or rhythm machine, you
should set the synchronization function to use an external clock. You
might use this function, for example, to play the Auto Accompaniment of
the Clavinova in perfect synchronization with an external sequencer.
To switch the synchronization from an internal clock to an external
clock (or vice versa), press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [–]
and [+] buttons cannot be used.
SYNC.
• Settings: INT. (internal clock),
EXT. (external clock)
• Basic setting: INT.
FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10
■ MIDI Filter .................................................................................................................
The FUNCTION [MIDI 2] display contains MIDI filter settings that
can be used to enable or prevent the transmission and reception of certain
types of MIDI data.
● Program Change Messages
Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For
example, the Clavinova can change voices in response to MIDI program
change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer. (These
messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices of connected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program change
messages transmitted from the Clavinova. (Program change messages
are transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the Clavinova.)
Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this feature is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set the PROGRAM
function to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of program
change messages.
CVP-109/107/105/700
Bank MSB and LSB messages can be
transmitted and received even when
PROGRAM is set to OFF.
200
202
PROGRAM
• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
• Basic setting: Tx&Rx
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○MIDI
● Control Change Messages
Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard performance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the
sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For example, the Clavinova can respond to control change messages transmitted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the
keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be controlled by sending control change messages from the Clavinova to that
device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating the
damper pedal, etc., on the Clavinova.)
Set CONTROL to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of
control change messages.
The control change data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in detail on page 17 in the Reference Booklet.
CONTROL
• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
• Basic setting: Tx&Rx
● System Exclusive Messages
System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed
MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturer’s devices.
Set SYS EX. to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of system exclusive messages.
The system exclusive data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in
detail on page 19 in the Reference Booklet.
SYS EX.
• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
• Basic setting: Tx&Rx
● Start/Stop Commands
A device that transmits the Start/Stop command can start and stop the
rhythm or sequence data performance of a receiving device via MIDI.
For example, you can transmit the Start/Stop command from an external
MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or song playback on the Clavinova. Also, an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine can be started and stopped by starting and stopping the Auto Accompaniment on the Clavinova.
Set START/STOP to ON to enable the transmission and reception of
Start/Stop commands.
START/STOP
• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
• Basic setting: OFF
FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11
■ Receive Filter ...........................................................................................................
201
The Receive Filter function lets you prevent the Clavinova from receiving channel-specific MIDI messages — such as note data and control
changes — on certain MIDI channels.
This function is useful, for example, when you want to control some of
the Clavinova’s voices exclusively from an external sequencer, and others
using only the Clavinova’s keyboard or its built-in Auto Accompaniment
and Song mode functions. (You can also have the Clavinova ignore channels carrying messages that are intended for another instrument connected
to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.)
By default, the Clavinova will receive messages on all 16 channels. Use
the following procedure to enable or disable the reception of a channel:
RECEIVE FILTER
• Settings: ON, OFF (x 16)
• Basic setting: ON (x 16)
CVP-109/107/105/700
203
MIDI
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
Z Select the channel.
Use the CHANNEL < and > LCD buttons to select the number of
the channel you want to enable or disable.
➔ An underline cursor is displayed below the selected channel
number.
X Press the rightmost LCD button.
➔ When the selected channel is enabled, ON is highlighted and the
channel number is enclosed in a solid box. When it is disabled,
OFF is highlighted, and the channel number is “ghosted.”
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12
■ MIDI Transpose ......................................................................................................
The MIDI Transpose function determines whether the Transpose setting in the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] display (page 188) will affect
the MIDI data received by the Clavinova.
The Clavinova will normally transpose the data it receives. Press the
MIDI TRANSPOSE button to switch this function on or off.
CVP-109/107/105/700
202
204
MIDI TRANSPOSE
• Settings: ON (enabled),
OFF (disabled)
• Basic setting: ON
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○MIDI
■ Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) ............................
When the ACMP&RHY function is set to 9—16, the performance
data for the rhythm and accompaniment parts is transmitted via the MIDI
[OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 9 through 16.
If the HARMONY function is set to 6–8, the notes added by the harmony types listed below are transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal
over MIDI channels 6 through 8.
Harmony types transmitted on channels 6 through 8:
• Echo
• Add Jazz Gtr
• Tremolo
• Add Brass
• Trill
• Add Strings
• Strumming
• In The Forest
* See page 87 for details on the Harmony function.
Notes added by other harmony types are always transmitted on the
RIGHT1 channel (page 201), regardless of this setting.
The rhythm, accompaniment, and harmony parts can be recorded by a
computer or external sequencer when these functions are turned on.
SEND CH (ACMP&RHY)
• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
9–16 (transmitted)
• Basic setting: OFF
SEND CH (HARMONY)
• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
6–8 (transmitted)
• Basic setting: OFF
• When transmitting rhythm, accompaniment, or harmony part data via MIDI,
do not select the MIDI channels used
by these parts as the send channels
(page 201) used to transmit the data
for your keyboard performance. Doing
so may result in your keyboard performance data being mixed with the
Auto Accompaniment or Harmony
data.
• If ACMP&RHY or HARMONY is turned
on, the data for the corresponding
part(s) will be transmitted via MIDI,
even if the RIGHT1 send channel
(page 201) has been turned off.
■ Song Transmission ............................................................................................
When the SONG function is set to ON, the Clavinova will transmit
song data via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Select this setting when you
want an external tone generator to sound in response to song data played
back by the Clavinova.
The transmission of song data is turned off by default.
SONG
• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
ON (transmitted)
• Basic setting: OFF
■ Remote Keyboard ...............................................................................................
MIDI data received over the channel set with the REMOTE KBD
function will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also
can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affecting your keyboard performance. The following data types can be received:
REMOTE KBD
• Settings: OFF (not received),
1 — 16 (receive channel)
• Basic setting: OFF
• Key ON/OFF
• Control Change (performance data; only those listed below)
#1
#7
#11
#64
#66
#67
#123
Modulation
Volume
Expression
Sustain Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
Soft Pedal
All notes off
#0
#32
#6
#96
#97
#100
#101
BANK Select MSB*
BANK Select LSB*
Data Entry MSB
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
Data Increment
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
Data Decrement
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
RPN LSB
(Pitch Bend Range only)
RPN MSB
(Pitch Bend Range only)
MIDI data received by the remote keyboard function cannot be output via the
MIDI [OUT] terminal.
• Program Change (voice change data)*
• Pitch Bend
203
Note: Items marked with an asterisk are used to change the main voice.
CVP-109/107/105/700
205
Backup
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13
■ Backup ............................................................................................................................
This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter
groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be
reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the desired group, then use the rightmost LCD button to set the
selected group to backup on/off. The (“*”) mark at the beginning of the
group name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on.
The settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to
the basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off.
Backup functions
• Settings: ON, OFF
• Basic settings: ON (REGISTRATION)
OFF (all other groups)
Backup is used for the following groups on the Clavinova.
Group
Description
VOICE SETTING
Voice-related settings
REV/CHO/EFF
Reverb, chorus, and effect settings
TUNE
Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning
PEDAL
Pedal function settings
ACMP SETTING
Auto Accompaniment-related settings
SONG SETTING
Settings related to the Song mode
REGISTRATION
Registration data, Freeze function settings
MIDI SETTING
MIDI function settings
VOCAL HARMONY
Vocal Harmony settings (CVP-109/107/700)
Permanent Settings
The following settings are always backed
up:
• Help language
• Song volume
• Video Out settings (CVP-109/107/700)
• Backup ON/OFF
Refer to page 13 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific
parameters in each group.
Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a
week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters
will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer
than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are maintained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.
CVP-109/107/105/700
204
206
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Backup
FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14
■ Recall ................................................................................................................................
This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic
settings) for a group of parameters, or for all parameters at once.
Press the ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the group you want to recall, then press the START button.
➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES
button to recall, or NO to cancel.
The following parameter groups of the Clavinova can be recalled.
Group
Description
VOICE SETTING
Voice-related settings
REV/CHO/EFF
Reverb, chorus, and effect settings
TUNE
Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning
PEDAL
Pedal function settings
ACMP SETTING
Auto Accompaniment-related settings
SONG SETTING
Settings related to the Song mode
REGISTRATION
Registration data, Freeze function settings
MIDI SETTING
MIDI function settings
VOCAL HARMONY
Vocal Harmony settings (CVP-109/107/700)
ALL
All of the above settings
Permanent Settings
The factory settings of the following
parameters are not recalled:
• Help language
• Song volume
• Video Out settings (CVP-109/107/700)
• Backup ON/OFF
However, these and all other settings can
be reset to the initial factory values by
turning the power on while holding down
the rightmost key on the keyboard (C7).
When this is done, the “Back up data
erased and replaced by factory data”
message appears to indicate that all
backed up data has been erased and the
factory settings have been recalled. After
this message is displayed for a few seconds, the main display will appear.
205
Refer to page 13 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific
parameters in each group.
CVP-109/107/105/700
207
Utility
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15
The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each
key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and
loaded whenever necessary. The currently loaded custom tuning can be
turned on or off at any time by using the leftmost LCD button in this
display.
■ Micro Tuning Setup ............................................................................................
Z Select a key.
Press the key to be tuned.
➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key
will appear in the display.
X Set the tuning.
Press the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] to
tune the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the
leftmost LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in order to check the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of ±0
cents for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously
pressing both the TUNE ▼ and ▲ buttons.
TUNE
• Range: –100 cent — +100 cent
–1 — +1 semitone
• Basic Value: 0 cent (all keys)
C Repeat steps 1 and 2.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned.
■ Micro Tuning Files ..............................................................................................
The custom tuning can be named and saved to disk as a tuning file.
Tuning files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are
no longer needed.
Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.
Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk
drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or
rename a tuning file, the inserted disk should contain the file in question.
CVP-109/107/105/700
206
208
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility
X Select the desired file operation.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file
operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
C Press the START button.
After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the
selected file operation appears.
The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 193
through 195. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file
operation.
LOAD
See page 193.
SAVE
See page 194.
DELETE
See page 195.
NAME
See page 195.
FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16
This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament)
configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting
USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set
for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to disk for future recall.
The Scale Tuning function does not
affect the pitch of song data played back
by the Clavinova.
■ Preset Scale ..............................................................................................................
This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or
temperaments.
Until equal temperament — the most commonly used tuning at
present — was accepted, various tunings have been created over the
years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This
feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better
feeling for the music of the corresponding eras.
The Clavinova contains the following seven temperaments:
207
• EQUAL
• PURE(MAJOR)
• PURE(MINOR)
• MEANTONE
• PYTHAGOREAN
• WERCKMEISTER
• KIRNBERGER
CVP-109/107/105/700
209
Utility
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Z Select PRESET with the leftmost LCD button.
➔ The following display appears:
X Select a scale.
Press the SCALE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the parameter, then use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the temperament type.
When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) temperament,
the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set. This
allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key.
C Select the central key.
Press the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the central key.
KEY
• Settings: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab,
A, Bb, B
• Basic setting: C
■ User Scale Setup .................................................................................................
This function allows you to individually tune each key within an octave. The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same
key in all other octaves.
Z Select USER with the leftmost LCD button.
➔ The following display appears:
X Press the key to be tuned.
➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key
appears.
CVP-109/107/105/700
208
210
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Utility
C Set the tuning.
Set the pitch by pressing the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons, or by using the
data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to
check the sound during this operation. The default tuning of ±0 cents
can be instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously pressing the TUNE ▲ and ▼ buttons.
TUNE
• Range: -64 cent — +63 cent
• Basic Value: 0 (all keys)
V Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.
■ User Scale Files ...................................................................................................
The custom scale can be named and saved to disk as a user scale file.
User scale files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they
are no longer needed.
Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.
Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk
drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or
rename a user scale file, the inserted disk should contain the file in
question.
X Select the desired file operation.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file
operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
C Press the START button.
209
After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the
selected file operation appears.
The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 193
through 195. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file
operation.
LOAD
See page 193.
SAVE
See page 194.
DELETE
See page 195.
NAME
See page 195.
CVP-109/107/105/700
211
Utility
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] Display — page 17 (CVP-109/107/700)
The functions on this page let you set the display characteristics for
the lyrics and chords (page 129) that are output to a television or video
monitor connected to the Clavinova’s [VIDEO OUT] jack (page 215).
You can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as well as the
color of the display background.
CVP-109/107/700
■ Character Size ........................................................................................................
Press the leftmost LCD button to set the size of the characters displayed on the monitor screen.
➔ The SIZE function setting switches between LARGE and SMALL
each time you press the button.
SIZE
• Settings: LARGE, SMALL
• Basic setting: LARGE
• The large character display may not fit
on some television screens. In such
cases, use the SMALL setting.
• When the SMALL setting is used, the
widths of horizontal lines may appear
to vary on certain television screens.
■ Character Color .....................................................................................................
The characters displayed on the video screen can be set to any of a
variety of colors. Press one of the CHARACTER ▼ or ▲ buttons to select that function, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to
change the setting.
CHARACTER
• Range: 1 (black) — 27 (white)
• Basic setting: 19 (blue)
Character colors may appear uneven or
blurred on certain television screens.
➔ Each value from 1 to 27 selects a different character color.
To return the character color to its basic setting of 19, press either the
[–] and [+] buttons or the CHARACTER ▼ and ▲ buttons simultaneously.
■ Background Color ..............................................................................................
You can set the background to one of four colors: white, blue, black,
or green. Press one of the BACKGROUND ▼ or ▲ buttons to select that
function, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the
setting.
To return the background color to its basic setting of WHITE, press
either the [–] and [+] buttons or the BACKGROUND ▼ and ▲ buttons
simultaneously.
CVP-109/107/105/700
210
212
BACKGROUND
• Settings: WHITE, BLUE, BLACK,
GREEN
• Basic setting: WHITE
CHAPTER
10: Connections
Audio and Video Connections
○○○○○○○○○○
The Clavinova is equipped with jacks that let you connect a variety of audio devices. You
can connect headphones, a stereo system, or PA equipment for audio output, as well as
input from a tone generator or other instrument. The CVP-109/107/700 also has
microphone and video jacks that further expand the Clavinova’s potential for musical fun.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting audio equipment, as failing to do so can result in damage to speakers and other problems.
Headphones
MIC. VOL.
MIN
MIC.
PHONES
MAX
To use headphones, connect them to one of
the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/4" phone
jacks) located below the left end of the keyboard. The Clavinova’s built-in speaker system
is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones are connected. Two people can enjoy
listening to the Clavinova together by connecting two pairs of headphones to the two jacks.
Recommended Headphones:
Yamaha HPE-160 headphones
MIC/LINE
CVP-109/107/700
Microphone (CVP-109/107/700)
You can connect a microphone to the CVP-109/107/700 to enjoy singing
along as you perform or play back song data. The Clavinova can even add
automatic harmonies and other effects to your vocals when you use the Vocal
Harmony function (page 175). The Clavinova will output your vocals through
the built-in speakers or [PHONES] jacks, as well as the AUX OUT jacks.
Z Connect the microphone. ........................................................................
Connect your microphone to the [MIC.] jack (standard 1/4" phone
jack) located below the left end of the keyboard.
MIC. VOL.
MIN
MIC.
Use a unidirectional microphone for best
results.
PHONES
MAX
211
MIC/LINE
CVP-109/107/105/700
213
Audio and Video Connections
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
X Set the input level. ...........................................................................................
Set the [MIC/LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC.] jack) to the
MIC position.
You should set the [MIC/LINE] switch to
the LINE position when connecting an
audio source with line-level output to the
[MIC.] jack.
MIC/LINE
C Adjust the microphone volume. .......................................................
Use the [MIC. VOL.] knob (located next to the [MIC.] jack) to set the
microphone volume, then trying singing into the microphone. The volume should be set high enough that the [SIGNAL] lamp on the front
panel lights steadily when you sing, but not so high that the [OVER]
lamp lights. (These two lamps can be found at the left end of the panel,
next to the [VOCAL HARMONY] button.)
The Vocal Harmony function (page 175)
may not work properly if the [OVER] lamp
lights during microphone use.
MIC/LINE
Audio Input and Output
You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by
using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the left end
of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or rear panel (CVP-105).
■ AUX IN Jacks ...........................................................................................................
CAUTION
L/L+R
R
AUX IN
Tone Generator
CVP-109/107/105/700
The volume of the audio signal input at
the AUX IN jacks is affected by the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider.
212
214
The sounds of other instruments or
tone generator modules can be output
through the speaker system of the
Clavinova by connecting audio cables to
the AUX IN jacks as shown here.
Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack for
monophonic input. For stereo input, connect the left channel output to the AUX
IN [L/L+R] jack, and the right channel
output to the AUX IN [R] jack.
Never connect the Clavinova’s AUX
OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either
directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections could result
in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may
even damage the Clavinova.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Audio
and Video Connections
■ AUX OUT Jacks ....................................................................................................
L/L+R
By connecting audio cables to the
AUX OUT jacks as shown here, you can
output the sound of the Clavinova to a
stereo system, amplifier, mixing console,
or recording equipment. Since the AUX
OUT jacks provide output at a fixed
level, you will need to use the controls
on the connected equipment to adjust the
overall volume of the sound from the
Clavinova.
Use the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack for
monophonic output. For stereo output,
connect the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack to
the left channel input, and the AUX
OUT [R] jack to the right channel input.
R
AUX OUT
Stereo System
Expression Pedal (CVP-109/107/700)
EXP.
PEDAL
You can connect an optional Yamaha
FC7 Foot Controller to the [EXP.
PEDAL] jack, located at the left on the
underside of the unit, to control the volume of your keyboard performance with
your foot.
Video Monitor (CVP-109/107/700)
VIDEO
OUT
213
Television
You can connect the Clavinova to a
television or video monitor to display the
lyrics and chords in your song data on a
larger screen.
Connect one end of a video cable to
the [VIDEO OUT] jack (standard pin
jack), which is located at the left on the
underside of the unit, and the other end
to the video input jack on your television
or video monitor. Make sure the
[VIDEO SELECT] switch is set to the
position (PAL or NTSC) that matches
the standard used by your video equipment.
You can set the Clavinova’s video
display characteristics using the settings
in the FUNCTION [VIDEO OUT] display (page 212).
Use an audio-video cable with good highfrequency characteristics and RCA-type
pin jacks to connect the Clavinova to a
television or video monitor.
CVP-109/107/105/700
215
Data Connections
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
You can use the MIDI terminals to connect your Clavinova to a
wide range of MIDI devices, including personal computers,
sequencers, tone generators, and so on. In addition, the Clavinova
features a [TO HOST] connector that lets you connect it directly
to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT, or other compatible personal
computer without the use of a special MIDI interface.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting
computers or MIDI equipment, as failing to do so can result in
damage to equipment.
Connecting MIDI Equipment
Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI terminals on the Clavinova to
other MIDI devices. The Clavinova’s MIDI terminals are located at the left
of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or rear panel (CVP-105).
Tone generators or other devices to be controlled by the Clavinova can
be connected to the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Devices that will control the
Clavinova should be connected to the MIDI [IN] terminal. If you have a
personal computer or sequencer that will control the Clavinova, you may
want to connect it to both the [IN] and [OUT] terminals to allow two-way
communication. In this case, any other instruments to be controlled by the
same device can be connected to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.
When you use the MIDI terminals, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to
the MIDI position. The MIDI terminals will not transmit or receive data if
this switch is set to any other position.
You can set the Clavinova’s MIDI parameters using pages 9 through
12 of the FUNCTION display (see page 201 through 204).
Mac
PC-1
[TO HOST] or MIDI?
• If you simply want to connect your
Clavinova to a personal computer, it
may be more convenient to use the
[TO HOST] terminal, as your computer
won’t need a special MIDI interface to
make that connection.
• The MIDI terminals are particularly
convenient when you want the
Clavinova to function as part of a more
extensive MIDI setup.
MIDI
PC-2
HOST SELECT
THRU
OUT
IN
MIDI
Tone Generator
MIDI Sequencer
Connecting to a Host Computer
You can connect the Clavinova to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT,
or compatible personal computer using the [TO HOST] connector, which
is located at the left of the unit on the underside (CVP-109/107/700) or
rear panel (CVP-105). If you do, be sure to set the adjacent [HOST SELECT] switch to the appropriate setting for your computer model.
CVP-109/107/105/700
214
216
• Turn off both the Clavinova and the
computer before connecting the cable.
• When the Clavinova is connected to a
host computer, turn on the computer
first, then the Clavinova.
• Disconnect the cable when not using
the [TO HOST] terminal. If it is left
connected, the Clavinova may not
function properly.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Data
Connections
■ Connecting to an Apple Macintosh or Compatible Computer ................................................................................................................................................
Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer
port on your Macintosh (whichever port your MIDI software is using for MIDI
data communication) using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable.
Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “Mac” position.
You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer
side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owner’s
manual). In any case, the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz.
Set to the “Mac”
position.
Mac
PC-1
TO HOST
● “Mac” Cable Connections
MIDI
PC-2
HOST SELECT
MINI DIN
8-PIN
Apple Macintosh
compatible computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 (HSK i)
1 (HSK 0)
5 (RxD-)
4 GND
3 (TxD-)
8 (RxD+)
7 (GP i)
6 (TxD+)
MINI DIN
8-PIN
• 8-pin system peripheral cable
• Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps
■ Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ................................
Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on
your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cross
cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “PC-2” position.
Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any settings you
might have to make on the computer side.
Set to the “PC-2”
position.
Mac
PC-1
TO HOST
If your system doesn’t work
properly with the connections
and settings listed above, your
software may require different
settings. Check your software
operation manual: if it requires
a 31,250 bps data transfer rate,
set the [HOST SELECT] switch
to “PC-1.”
● “PC-2” Cable Connections
MIDI
PC-2
HOST SELECT
IBM-PC/AT compatible
computer
MINI DIN
8-PIN
6 7 8
3 4 5
1 2
8 (CTS)
7 (RST)
2 (RxD)
5 (GND)
D-SUB
9-PIN
3 (TxD)
• 8-pin mini DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cable
• Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps
● Connector Pin Numbers
MINI DIN 8-PIN
1
2
3
4
8
5
● MIDI Driver
The Music Software Collection disk that came with your Clavinova
contains special MIDI driver software intended for use with the Windows 95 and Windows 98 operating systems. This driver software may
be necessary when using computer software with the Clavinova. Install
the MIDI driver from the disk to your computer if necessary. Refer to
the text files on the disks (listed below) for installation instructions.
D-SUB 9-PIN
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
A:\driver\readme_e.txt
A:\driver\licensee.txt
215
“A:” is the name of the floppy disk drive.
CVP-109/107/105/700
217
APPENDICES
Effect Type Lists
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The tables in this appendix contain descriptions of the various
reverb, chorus, and effect types that are available for use on the
CVP-109/107/105/700.
XG REVERB, XG CHORUS, and XG EFFECT (all abbreviated as XG in
the main display) appear as the selected type when a style uses a
special reverb, chorus, or effect setting that is not available as a regular
selection. These settings cannot be selected from the corresponding
menu displays; they disappear as soon as you select a different reverb,
chorus, or effect type.
Natural Reverb Type List (CVP-109)
Type
Description
MEDIUM HALL
CONCERT HALL
High-quality hall reverb effects
CATHEDRAL
WOOD ROOM
STUDIO ROOM
High-quality room reverb effects
Reverb Type List
Type
Description
HALL1
HALL2
HALL3
Concert hall reverb effects
HALL4
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
Small room reverb effects
ROOM4
STAGE1
STAGE2
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument
PLATE1
PLATE2
XG REVERB
CVP-109/107/105/700
Special reverb setting. See note, above.
216
218
Simulated steel plate reverb effects
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Effect
Type Lists
Chorus Type List
Type
Description
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness
to the sound
CHORUS4
CHORUS5
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking
off and landing
FLANGER4
XG CHORUS
Special chorus setting. See note, above.
Effect Type List
Type
Description
109/107/700
105
HALL1
HALL2
Concert hall reverb effects
HALL3
HALL4
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
Small room reverb effects
ROOM4
STAGE1
STAGE2
PLATE1
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument
Simulated steel plate reverb effects
PLATE2
EARLY REF1
EARLY REF2
Early reflection components of the reverb effect
GATE REVERB
Simulation of a gated reverb
REVERSE GATE
Simulation of a gated reverb played back in reverse
KARAOKE1
KARAOKE2
Echo effects suitable for vocals
KARAOKE3
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness
to the sound
CHORUS4
217
CHORUS5
CVP-109/107/105/700
219
Effect Type Lists
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Effect Type List
Type
Description
109/107/700
105
NA
NA
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking
off and landing
FLANGER4
SYMPHONIC
SYMPHONIC1
Multi-stage versions of the modulation provided by a
celeste-type effect
SYMPHONIC2
PHASER
Modulation effect created by cyclical phase shifting
ROTARY SP1
ROTARY SP2
ROTARY SP3
Modulation effects that simulate rotary speakers
ROTARY SP4
ROTARY SP5
TREMOLO1
TREMOLO2
GTR TREMOLO
Cyclical volume modulation effects
Tremolo effect that is suitable for guitar sounds
AUTO PAN
AUTO PAN1
Effects that cyclically move the sound from right to left
and front to back
AUTO PAN2
AUTO WAH
AUTO WAH1
Cyclical wah effects; useful for electric guitar sounds,
etc.
AUTO WAH2
TCH WAH1
DELAY LCR
Three delay sounds: L (left), R (right), and C (center)
DELAY LR
L and R delays with two feedback delays
ECHO
L and R delays with independent feedback for L and R
CROSS DELAY
Two delays (L and R) with crossed feedback
AMP SIM
Effect that simulates a guitar amp
DIST HARD
DIST SOFT
Effects that add distortion with an edge to the sound;
useful for electric guitar sounds, etc.
EQ DISCO
Disco-oriented equalizer effect
EQ TEL
Equalizer effect that simulates sound heard over the phone
XG EFFECT
Special effect setting. See note, above.
CVP-109/107/105/700
218
220
TCH WAH2
Velocity-triggered wah effects; useful for electric guitar
sounds, etc.
Messages
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
● General (Panel Operation)
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as song data conversion) that cannot be performed during recording or playback.
➾ Stop song recording or playback, or exit the Song Record or Song Play mode, then
perform the operation again.
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as selection of a style
or Music Database setup) that cannot be performed during playback.
➾ Stop song playback, or exit the Song Play mode, then perform the operation again.
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as copying or deletion
of song data) that cannot be performed in the Song Record mode.
➾ Stop recording, or exit the Song Record mode, then perform the operation again.
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as the selection of a
style, etc.) that cannot be performed during Accompaniment Assistance playback, or an
operation (such as selection of a Guide Control function, etc.) that cannot be performed
while editing Accompaniment Assistance data.
➾ Turn the Accompaniment Assistance function off, then perform the operation again.
A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed.
● General (Direct Access)
This prompt appears when you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 22).
➾ Press the panel button that corresponds to the settings you want to display. (Be
sure to press the second button while this message is showing.)
This message appears if you press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by a panel button that
does not correspond to a Direct Access display. (See page 22.)
➾ Press [DIRECT ACCESS] again, then press a panel button that corresponds to a
Direct Access display.
● General (Disk-related)
This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive.
➾ Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again.
This prompt appears when you attempt to rename or convert a song that doesn’t contain
any data.
➾ Select a song that contains data, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk
drive.
This message appears when you attempt to load, rename, or delete a file, and no file of
the specified type can be found on the disk in the disk drive.
➾ Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file.
This message appears if you try to save Accompaniment Assistance data to disk (page
86) when no Accompaniment Assistance data has been recorded. It also appears if you try
to save a custom style to disk (page 101), but have selected a memory number that
doesn’t contain any style data.
219
➾ Create some Accompaniment Assistance data or a custom style, or select a
memory number that contains custom style data.
CVP-109/107/105/700
221
Messages
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
This message appears when a new or improperly formatted disk has been inserted into
the disk drive. (See page 131.)
➾ Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the
formatting process.
This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations using a
disk whose write-protect tab is in the “protect” position.
➾ Set the write-protect tab to the “write-enable” position (page 132), then try the operation again. If the operation still cannot be performed, the disk itself has internal write
protection, making it impossible to perform recording or file operations on the disk.
This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations
on song files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the
song file type, operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be
possible using the CVP-109/107/105/700.
An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk.
➾ Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second
time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at
fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.
This appears for a few seconds when a time-consuming operation such as Format, Song
Copy, etc., is finished.
This message is displayed while data is being transferred between the Clavinova and the
disk.
➾ The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished.
When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to confirm
whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not.
➾ Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display.
The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.
➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 198), or
use a disk that has more available space. If this message appears during song
recording, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved
automatically.
This message appears when you try to create more files than the disk is capable of storing. You can record up to 60 song files on a 2DD or 2HD disk. A 2DD disk can hold about
107 files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 219 files.
➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files from the disk (page 198),
or use a disk that has more available space.
A file with the same name already exists.
➾ Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or press
CANCEL to abort the operation.
This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from
the disk or saving data.
➾ Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation
again.
This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit the data of commercially
available software or data recorded on instruments other than the CVP-109/107/105/700/
103 or the CVP-94/92/98/96/600.
➾ Press YES to convert the data for recording or editing on the CVP-109/107/105/
700. Press NO if you don't want to convert the data.
It may not be possible to record to tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 of songs converted in this manner.
CVP-109/107/105/700
220
222
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Messages
● General (Memory-related)
This message appears when the Clavinova’s memory has become full while recording a
song in the internal memory (page 174). If this happens, recording will stop and any data
recorded up to that point will be saved automatically.
This message is also displayed if the Clavinova’s memory becomes full when recording
data in a custom style (see page 103).
This message appears while the Clavinova is storing the data of a song recorded to the
internal memory after it has been edited using the Track Edit or Initial Edit functions.
➾ Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation.
This message appears when you execute an operation, such as playback of disk software,
that will cause the Clavinova to delete data recorded to the internal memory.
➾ Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal memory, then perform the
desired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data.
This message appears if you try to select one of the following functions while editing song
data that has been recorded to the internal memory: Chord Sequence (page 141), Step
Edit (page 146), Song Name (page 166), Setup Memory (page 172), or Vocal Harmony
Memory (page 173).
➾ Use the Song Copy function (page 196) to copy the song to a disk, delete the CVP
MEMORY song (page 174), then perform the desired operation using the data on
the disk.
● Custom Style Mode
This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged.
(See page 92.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the time signature of the
custom style. (See page 93.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures in
a section of the custom style. (See page 94.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform an operation that can only
be performed after the part has been deleted. (See page 95.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you store a custom style (page 98). It also appears if you try to change styles before you’ve stored the custom style (page 104).
➾ Select OK to store the custom style. Press CANCEL to return to the previous display without storing data.
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit the Custom Style mode before
storing the custom style. (See page 104.)
➾ Select YES to store the custom style. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CANCEL to return to the previous display.
This message appears when the previous version of the custom style cannot be recalled
because the time signature has been changed. (See page 99.)
221
If you attempt to save a custom style to disk before storing it in memory, this message
prompts you to store the style before proceeding. (See page 102.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
223
Messages
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
This message appears if there is not enough internal memory capacity available to store
the custom style. (See page 103.)
This message appears when DELETE is selected in the display shown above.
➾ Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do not
want to delete the style.
This message appears if the style selected for deletion in the display shown above is the
source style on which the style currently being edited was based.
➾ Press OK to return to the preceding display, and select a different style for deletion.
● Style File Load
This message appears if you attempt to load a Style file when the memory capacity is not
sufficient to hold the specified file. (See page 107.)
Some Style files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN function. (See page 106.)
➾ Load the Style file, then use the normal playback methods to hear the style in
question.
● Step Edit
This message appears if you try to record note data or perform a cut, copy, or paste operation on the SYSTEM track (page 146) while editing a song with the Step Edit function.
➾ Select a different track (1 through 16) and try the operation again.
This message appears if you try to record an event (page 146) that either contains invalid
data (e.g., a System Exclusive event that is not terminated by an F7) or is located at an
inappropriate timing (e.g., a Time Signature event in the middle of a measure).
➾ Check the parameter settings in the event against the MIDI Data Format (page 19
in the Reference Booklet), then record the event again.
● Chord Sequence
This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function
while recording.
➾ Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CANCEL to return to the Chord Sequence function without storing.
This message appears when you attempt to enter an accompaniment style or section
change at a position other than the beginning of a measure while recording data with the
Chord Sequence or Accompaniment Assistance functions.
➾ Record the style or section change in question at the beginning of the measure.
(See page 142.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
222
224
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Messages
● Other Record Edit
This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without
writing the data to disk.
➾ Press YES to save the edited data. Press NO to exit without saving. Press CANCEL
to return to the Initial Edit display without saving.
This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Setup Memory function (page
172) to save the current panel settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode.
➾ Select YES to save the panel settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD
EDIT 2 display without saving.
This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Vocal Harmony Memory function
of the CVP-109/107/700 (page 173) to save the current Vocal Harmony settings with the
song being edited in Song Record mode.
➾ Select YES to save the Vocal Harmony settings. Press CANCEL to return to the
RECORD EDIT 2 display without saving.
● Song Copy & Disk Copy
This message appears before you start a Song Copy or Disk Copy operation to inform you
of the number of times the disks must be exchanged. (See page 197.)
This message prompts you to insert the destination disk when copying data from one disk
to another. (See page 197.)
This message appears when you try to copy data from a 2DD disk to a 2HD disk — or vice
versa — using the Disk Copy function (page 196).
➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then perform the operation again from the
beginning. Make sure the destination disk you insert is the same type (2DD or
2HD) as the source disk being copied.
This message appears if you insert the source disk when prompted to insert the destination disk while using the Disk Copy function (page 197) to copy data from one disk to another.
➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again
from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful
not to confuse the source and destination disks.
When you first insert the destination disk while copying a song from one disk to another
disk, this message prompts you to specify the song number to which the song is to be
copied. (See page 197.)
This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying data from one disk to
another. (See page 197.)
This message is displayed if you insert a disk other than the specified disk (source or
destination) when prompted to exchange disks while using the Disk Copy function (page
197) to copy data from one disk to another.
➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again
from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful
to insert the correct disk as specified.
This message indicates that you have selected the same song number as both the source
and the destination when copying a song within a disk. (See sidebar, page 197.)
223
➾ Change the destination song number.
CVP-109/107/105/700
225
Messages
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
● Song Data Conversion
This message appears if you attempt to convert song data that has been saved on a 2HD
disk. (See page 199.)
➾ Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the
data conversion using the 2DD disk.
Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which
the data was saved.
● Hardware-related
This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is
not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the
MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active.
➾ Turn off both the Clavinova and the host computer. Check the cable connection and
the position of the HOST SELECT switch (page 216), then turn on the computer
first, followed by the Clavinova.
The Clavinova will retain data protected by the Backup function (page 206) as long as it is
used regularly. If the instrument is not turned on for a week or longer, however, the data
may be lost. This message appears when the Clavinova is turned on after data has been
lost. It also appears when you recall all factory data (page 207.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
224
226
Troubleshooting
225
Problem
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Cause
Solution
The Clavinova does not turn on.
The Clavinova has not been plugged
in properly.
Securely insert the female plug into
the socket on the Clavinova, and the
male plug into a proper AC outlet.
A click or pop is heard when the
power is turned on or off.
Electrical current is being applied to
the instrument.
This is normal, and is no cause for
concern.
Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s
speakers.
The noise may be due to interference
caused by the use of a mobile phone
in close proximity to the Clavinova.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it
further away from the Clavinova.
The display is too bright or too dark
to read.
The brightness may be affected by
the surrounding temperature.
Adjust the contrast of the display
using the [CONTRAST] control.
(See page 11.)
The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.
Either the overall keyboard volume
or the independent volume level of
the keyboard part is set too low.
Increase the overall keyboard level
in the main display (page 23), or use
the VOLUME function in the appropriate KEYBOARD display (pages
37, 39, or 42) to raise the volume of
the keyboard part in question.
The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low
compared to that of the keyboard.
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is
set too low.
Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] level.
The volume level of one or more
accompaniment parts or song tracks
is set too low.
Raise the part or track level(s) in the
appropriate MIXER display (page
77 or 120).
The overall volume is low, or no
sound is heard.
The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low.
Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
The Local Control function is turned off.
Turn the Local Control function on.
(See page 201.)
The damper pedal has no effect, or
the sound continuously sustains
even when the damper pedal is not
pressed.
The pedal cord plug is not connected.
Securely insert the pedal cord plug
into the proper jack. (See pages 48,
54 and 62 in the Reference booklet
for the CVP-105, CVP-700 and
CVP-109/107, respectively.)
Style or song playback does not
start.
The MIDI Sync function is set to EXT.
Set the MIDI Sync function to INT.
(See page 202.)
When the keyboard is played, not
all of the notes sound.
The Clavinova’s total simultaneous
polyphonic capacity (maximum
number of notes) has been exceeded.
Since the configuration of the tone
generation system is such that later
notes have priority, previous notes
may occasionally be cut off. (See
“Specifications” on page 67 of the
Reference Booklet for details about
the simultaneous polyphonic capacity.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
227
Troubleshooting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Problem
Solution
The Auto Accompaniment does not
play back.
The Auto Accompaniment is not
turned on.
Press the [ACMP ON] button to
turn on the Auto Accompaniment.
The desired chord is not recognized
or output by the Auto Accompaniment.
The keys are not being played correctly.
Refer to the Fingering Chart (page
15 of the Reference Booklet).
The keys are not being played according to the selected accompaniment mode.
Check the accompaniment mode,
and play the keys according to the
selected mode. (See page 72.)
The maximum of 60 songs cannot
be recorded.
The memory capacity is full because
the playing time of one or more
songs is long, or many functions
were used.
Delete unnecessary songs (page
198) or record to a new disk.
Some tracks do not play back when
playing back data.
Playback of the track(s) is turned off.
Turn on playback for the tracks that
you want to hear. (See pages 117
and 120.)
CVP-109/107/105/700
226
228
Cause
MIDI and Data Compatibility ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
■ MIDI
● Sequence Format
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide
standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible
musical instruments and equipment to share musical information
and control one another.
• Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data
differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the
connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You can
check whether your instrument supports certain data types by
referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owner’s manual
for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for the CVP109/107/105/700 is found on page 38 in the Reference Booklet.
MIDI Terminals
Data received via the
MIDI IN terminal is retransmitted unchanged
through this terminal.
This terminal transmits the MIDI data.
This terminal
receives the MIDI
data.
THRU
OUT
IN
MIDI
MIDI Cable
Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables.
• MIDI settings can be made in the MIDI pages of the Function mode display. (See pages 201 through 204.)
• Further information on MIDI and its applications is available in various music books and magazines.
■ Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data compatibility:
whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded
by CVP-109/107/105/700, and whether or not the CVP-109/107/
105/700 can playback commercially available song data or song data
created for other instruments or on a computer.
Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may
be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have
to perform some special operations before the data can be played
back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the
information below.
● Basic Check Points
The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the
items below.
• Disk Format
• Sequence format
• Voice allocation format
● Disk format
227
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with
various devices, including computers. Different devices have
different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first
configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.
This operation is called “formatting.”
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided,
double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density),
and each type has different formatting systems.
• CVP-109/107/105/700 can record and playback with both
types of floppy disks.
• When formatted by the CVP-109/107/105/700, a 2DD disk
stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to
1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44
MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used
to indicate the format type of disk.)
• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used
is compatible with the format of the disk.
The system which records song data is called “sequence format.”
• Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the
disk matches that of the MIDI device.
[Common Sequence Formats]
SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
types: Format 0 or Format 1.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most
commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.
• The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with both Format
0 and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17
chunks).
• Song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.
ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s
MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.
This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.
• The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with ESEQ.
● Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called
“program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice
allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.”
•
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback.
[Main Voice Allocation Formats]
GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level
1, as is most commercially available software.
• The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with GM System
Level 1.
XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format,
and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more
voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into
the future.
• The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with XG.
• Song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700 using
voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.
DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.
This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software.
• The CVP-109/107/105/700 is compatible with DOC.
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions
above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods.
CVP-109/107/105/700
229
Index
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○
A
E
L
Accompaniment Assistance ................. 81–86
Accompaniment Mode ................... 69, 71–73
Accompaniment Off Events ....................... 84
accompaniment styles ................ see “styles”
Acmp Assist files .............................. 192–195
aftertouch events ............................. 156–157
All Setup files ................................... 192–195
audio connections ............................ 213–215
Auto Accompaniment ........................... 69–90
Easy Play ......................................... 125, 127
Effect Type List ................................ 219–220
effects .................................................. 54–60
effects, Custom Style ....................... 100–101
effects, Song .................................... 120–121
effects, vocals .......................................... 179
end mark .............................. 83, 85, 144, 145
ending pattern ...................................... 67–68
Equalizer Lock ........................................... 26
event list, editing .............................. 158–160
event list, filtering ..................................... 161
events, adding .......................................... 158
expression pedal ................................ 24, 215
LCD, changing a value ............................... 17
LCD, selecting a function ........................... 16
left LCD buttons ......................................... 18
Left Pedal ................................................. 190
left voice ............................................... 41–44
lid ............................................................. 11
loading, data files ............................. 193–194
loading, style files ............................. 105–107
Local Control ............................................ 201
lyrics ................................................... 15, 129
B
Backup ..................................................... 206
Balance, Vocal Harmony ......................... 178
basic settings ............................................. 19
beat ...................................................... 28, 93
Bend Range ............................................. 191
break .......................................................... 84
C
Channel Aftertouch events ....................... 156
channels, MIDI ................................. 201, 205
Chord Assistance ................................. 75–76
chord indication .................................... 72–73
Chord Sequence .............................. 141–145
chorus .................................................. 51–53
chorus, Custom Style ....................... 100–101
chorus, Song .................................... 120–121
chorus, vocals .......................................... 178
Chorus Type List ...................................... 219
computer .......................................... 216–217
contrast ...................................................... 11
Control Change events .................... 153–154
controls ................................................ 12–13
convert, song data ................................... 199
Custom Style ...................................... 91–107
CVP MEMORY (song) ............................. 174
Fade In ....................................................... 67
Fade Out .................................................... 68
fast forward .............................................. 124
file icons ................................................... 114
fill-in patterns ........................................ 63–64
filter, MIDI Filter ................................ 202–204
fingering (chords) ..................... 72–73, 75–76
Fixed Velocity ........................................... 189
floppy disks .................................................. 9
formatting, Disk ................................ 131, 200
free tempo ................................................ 116
Function ........................................... 186–187
function, resetting ....................................... 19
functions in normal rectangles ................... 21
functions in rounded rectangles ................. 16
G
Glide Range ............................................. 190
Guide ......................................... 15, 125–129
guide lamps .............................................. 129
Guide Mode ............................................. 128
D
H
damper pedal ............................. 45, 190–191
data dial ..................................................... 17
deleting, Accompaniment Assistance ........ 85
deleting, Chord Sequence ....................... 144
deleting, data files .................................... 195
deleting, Style Files .................................. 102
deleting, tracks ................................. 168–169
Demo Play ........................................... 14–15
detune ........................................................ 40
Direct Access ............................................. 22
Disk Copy ......................................... 196–197
disk drive ...................................................... 9
Disk Format ...................................... 131, 200
Disk functions ................................... 192–200
display pages ............................................. 20
Dual ................................................ 38–40, 44
Harmony .............................................. 87–89
Harmony Mode ........................ 181–182, 185
Harmony Part ........................................... 182
headphones ............................................. 213
Help ...................................................... 29–30
host computer .................................. 216–217
highlighted items ........................................ 16
CVP-109/107/105/700
I
Initial Edit ......................................... 170–172
introduction pattern .................................... 66
K
key cover .................................................... 10
Key Touch ................................................ 189
keyboard guide lamps .............................. 129
keyboard percussion .................................. 36
main display ............................................... 16
main voice ................................ 36–37, 38, 42
Master Equalizer .................................. 25–26
memory, recording to ............................... 174
menu display .............................................. 18
messages ......................................... 221–228
messages, Custom Style ................. 103–104
Meta events ............................................. 157
metronome ........................................... 27–28
microphone ...................................... 213–214
Micro Tuning .................................... 208–209
MIDI equipment ........................................ 216
MIDI Filter ........................................ 202–203
MIDI functions .................................. 201–205
MIDI terminals .......................................... 216
MIDI Transpose ....................................... 204
Mixer, Auto Accompaniment ................ 77–78
Mixer, Song ...................................... 120–121
multi-track recording ........................ 135–138
Music Database ................................... 79–81
music stand ................................................ 10
N
naming, Custom Style ................................ 97
naming, data files ..................................... 195
naming, Registration ........................ 111–112
naming, Song ................................... 166–167
Natural Reverb ........................................... 48
Natural Reverb Type List ......................... 218
Next Note ......................................... 125, 127
Note events ...................................... 152–153
Note Record ..................................... 162–164
O
octave ............................................ 37, 39, 43
One Touch Setting ..................................... 90
Organ Flutes ........................................ 33–35
P
pages, display ............................................ 20
pan ................................................. 37, 40, 43
pan, Custom Style ............................ 100–101
pan, Song ......................................... 120–121
panel controls ....................................... 12–13
part, recording ...................................... 94–96
part, track assignment ...................... 118–119
Part Cancel ...................................... 117–118
part levels ....................... 77–78, 84, 100–101
228
230
F
M
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
pause ....................................................... 124
Pedal functions ................................ 190–191
pedals .................................................. 43, 45
Pianist styles ........................................ 61, 70
Piano Roll ................................. 126, 127, 129
pitch bend ................................................ 191
Pitch Bend events .................................... 155
playback, Auto Accompaniment ..... 70, 72–73
playback, Custom Style ........................... 103
Playback, demo songs ......................... 14–15
playback, Song ................................ 113–124
playback, styles .................................... 63–68
playback, style files .................................. 107
Polyphonic Aftertouch events .......... 156–157
power ......................................................... 11
practicing .......................................... 125–127
preset scale ...................................... 209–210
Program Change events .......................... 155
Punch-in/out Recording ................... 138–140
Q
quantizing ................................... 96, 169–170
Quick Recording .............................. 132–135
R
229
Recall ....................................................... 207
Recall Section ............................................ 99
recalling, registration ........................ 109–110
Receive Filter ................................... 203–204
Record Edit functions ....................... 166–173
recording, Accompaniment Assistance 81–86
recording, Chord Sequence ............. 141–145
recording, Custom Style ....................... 91–98
recording, Song ................................ 130–140
recording, without a disk .......................... 174
recording, Step Edit ......................... 146–165
Registration ...................................... 108–112
Registration file ................................ 192–195
Registration Freeze .......................... 110–111
Remote Keyboard .................................... 205
Repeat ............................................. 122–123
Reverb ................................................. 46–50
reverb, Custom Style ....................... 100–101
reverb, Song .................................... 120–121
Reverb Type List ...................................... 218
reverb, vocals ................................... 177, 183
rewind ...................................................... 124
Rhythm On/Off ................................... 85, 145
right LCD buttons ....................................... 18
Right Pedal .............................................. 191
Setup files ........................................ 192–195
Setup Memory .......................................... 172
setup procedure ......................................... 10
soft pedal ........................................... 45, 190
software ................................................... 124
song, Chord Sequence .................... 141–145
song, Step Edit ................................. 146–165
Song Copy ....................................... 196–197
Song Data Transform ............................... 199
Song Delete ............................................. 198
Song Name ...................................... 166–167
Song Play ......................................... 113–124
Song Record .................................... 130–140
Song Transmission .................................. 205
sostenuto pedal .......................................... 45
Sound Repeat .......................... 126, 127, 129
Split ...................................................... 41–44
Split Point ................................. 41, 43–44, 74
Step Edit .......................................... 146–165
stereo position ................................. see “pan”
storing, Custom Style ................................. 98
storing, Registration ......................... 108–109
Style Clear ................................................. 99
style file ............................................ 105–107
styles, custom .................................... 91–107
styles, playback .................................... 63–68
styles, selecting .................................... 61–62
Synchronization (MIDI) ............................ 202
Synchronized Start ..................................... 65
Synchronized Stop ..................................... 74
System Exclusive events ......................... 157
Index
V
velocity ..................................................... 189
video monitor ........................................... 215
Video Out ................................................. 212
Vocal Harmony ................................ 175–183
Vocal Harmony data ........................ 184–185
Vocal Harmony Memory .......................... 173
voice, Organ Flutes .............................. 33–35
Voice Setting ............................................ 189
voices, selecting ..................... 31–32, 95, 119
volume ................................................. 23–24
volume, metromome .................................. 28
volume, part ................... 77–78, 84, 100–101
volume, song ............................................ 119
volume, track .................................... 120–121
volume, voices ............................... 37, 39, 42
T
Tap Start .................................................... 65
tempo ................................... 27, 84, 116, 120
Tempo events .......................................... 151
terminals and jacks .............................. 12–13
timbre ......................................................... 25
time signature ...................................... 28, 93
Time Signature events ............................. 152
Track Delete ..................................... 168–169
Track Edit ......................................... 167–170
Track Mix ......................................... 167–168
Track Recording ............................... 135–138
Track Quantize ................................. 169–170
tracks, adding ........................................... 138
tracks, song structure ............................... 130
Transform ................................................. 199
Transpose ........................................ 188, 204
troubleshooting ................................ 229–230
Tune ................................................. 188, 211
S
U
saving, Custom Style ....................... 101–102
saving, data files ...................................... 194
saving, Initial Edit ..................................... 171
saving, Step Edit ...................................... 165
saving, Vocal Harmony ............................ 184
Scale Tuning .................................... 209–211
second voice .................................. 38–40, 44
section ............................................ 92–94, 99
Send Channel .................................. 201, 205
user scale ......................................... 210–211
CVP-109/107/105/700
231
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted
by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio
frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful
to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker
or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type
of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed
by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
(class B)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
(2 wires)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU
FOND.
(polarity)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
230
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,
Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply.
2.
Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact
your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)
instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the
name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic
found in the Special Message Section of this manual.
3.
This product may be equipped with a polarized plug
(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the
plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the
problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete
outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4.
Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any
power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners
manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by
Yamaha.
5.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or
connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is
not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the
minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:
The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
6.
Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be
assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.
7.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products
should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and
other devices that produce heat should be avoided.
8.
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,
sink, or wet basement.
9.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from
the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm
activity.
11.
Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12.
Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13.
Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the
product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that
benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are
well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
231
92-469-2
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain
Tel: 91-577-7270
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
SWEDEN
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
ASIA
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
GREECE
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ITALY
Yamaha Corporation of America,
Keyboard Division
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3486-0011
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
SINGAPORE
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
HONG KONG
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-81-5868
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 3-699-2388
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division
[CL] 19
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
M.D.G., EMI Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 1999 Yamaha Corporation
V384960 909POCP4.3-04C0 Printed in Japan